summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/macros/latex
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'macros/latex')
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/README23
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/glossaries-nynorsk.dtx162
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/glossaries-nynorsk.ins36
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/glossaries-nynorsk.pdfbin0 -> 122934 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.md77
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/backref.pdfbin133242 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/backref.pdfbin0 -> 212976 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/hyperref.pdfbin0 -> 2454006 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.css155
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.html410
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdfbin296781 -> 295940 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.tex3383
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual2.html4
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual3.html4
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual4.html4
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual5.html4
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual6.html4
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual7.html4
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/nameref.pdfbin0 -> 189481 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/fdl.tex422
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hluatex.dtx26
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.dtx96
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdfbin2314278 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/manual.tex3383
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/nameref.pdfbin118154 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty22
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/README.md23
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/ReadableCV.cls560
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/ReadableCV.pdfbin0 -> 94148 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/ReadableCV.tex162
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/profilepic.jpgbin0 -> 42657 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/sig.pngbin0 -> 32720 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/vcell/README.md35
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/vcell/vcell.pdfbin0 -> 147125 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/vcell/vcell.sty76
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/vcell/vcell.tex271
36 files changed, 8830 insertions, 516 deletions
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/README b/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ec78a0f81e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/README
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+Nynorsk Language Module for glossaries Package
+
+Author: Eirik Haustveit
+ www.switchcraft.org
+
+Based on package by:
+
+ Nicola Talbot
+ www.dickimaw-books.com
+
+To install: copy *.ldf and *.dict to
+
+TEXMF/tex/latex/glossaries-nynorsk/
+
+where TEXMF is the texmf root directory.
+
+The glossaries package will automatically load this module if it is
+required.
+
+This material is subject to the LaTeX Project Public License.
+See http://www.ctan.org/license/lppl1.3
+for the details of that license.
+
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/glossaries-nynorsk.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/glossaries-nynorsk.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..71c8898bfa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/glossaries-nynorsk.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+%\iffalse
+% glossaries-nynorsk.dtx generated using makedtx version 1.1 (c) Eirik Haustveit
+% Command line args:
+% -src "(.*.ldf)=>\1"
+% -src "(.*.dict)=>\1"
+% -doc "glossaries-module.tex"
+% -author "Eirik Haustveit"
+% glossaries-nynorsk
+% Created on 2020/05/16 14:20
+%\fi
+%\iffalse
+%<*package>
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%</package>
+%\fi
+% \iffalse
+% Doc-Source file to use with LaTeX2e
+% Copyright (C) 2020 Eirik Haustveit, all rights reserved.
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{nlctdoc}
+
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\title{Glossaries Language Module: glossaries-nynorsk}
+\author{Eirik Haustveit}
+\date{version 1.0 (2020-05-16)}
+
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{glossaries-nynorsk.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%\fi
+%\maketitle
+%
+%This language module simply needs to be installed. The \sty{glossaries}
+%package will automatically load it if required.
+%
+%
+%
+%\StopEventually{}
+%\section{The Code}
+%\iffalse
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*glossaries-nynorsk.ldf>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%\subsection{glossaries-nynorsk.ldf}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesGlossariesLang{nynorsk}[2020/05/16 v1.0]
+
+\glsifusedtranslatordict{Nynorsk}
+{%
+ \addglossarytocaptions{\CurrentTrackedLanguage}%
+ \addglossarytocaptions{\CurrentTrackedDialect}%
+}
+{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{polyglossia}%
+ {%
+ \newcommand*{\glossariescaptionsnynorsk}{%
+ \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textnynorsk{Ordforklaringar}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textnynorsk{Forkortingar}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textnynorsk{Notasjon}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textnynorsk{Beskriving}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textnynorsk{Symbol}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textnynorsk{Side}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textnynorsk{Symbol}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textnynorsk{Tal}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \newcommand*{\glossariescaptionsnynorsk}{%
+ \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Ordforklaringar}%
+ \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Forkortingar}%
+ \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notasjon}%
+ \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beskriving}%
+ \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
+ \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Side}%
+ \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbol}%
+ \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Tal}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \ifcsdef{captions\CurrentTrackedDialect}
+ {%
+ \csappto{captions\CurrentTrackedDialect}%
+ {%
+ \glossariescaptionsnynorsk
+ }%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \ifcsdef{captions\CurrentTrackedLanguage}
+ {
+ \csappto{captions\CurrentTrackedLanguage}%
+ {%
+ \glossariescaptionsnynorsk
+ }%
+ }%
+ {%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \glossariescaptionsnynorsk
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% General default plural suffix:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\glspluralsuffix}{s}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Acronym default plural suffix:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\glsacrpluralsuffix}{\glspluralsuffix}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Acronym in \cs{textsc} default plural suffix
+% (\cs{glstextup} is used to cancel the effect of \cs{textsc}):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\glsupacrpluralsuffix}{\glstextup{\glsacrpluralsuffix}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\iffalse
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</glossaries-nynorsk.ldf>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%\iffalse
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*glossaries-dictionary-Nynorsk.dict>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%\subsection{glossaries-dictionary-Nynorsk.dict}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Nynorsk}
+
+\providetranslation{Glossary}{Ordforklaring}
+\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Forkortingar}
+\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Symbolliste}
+\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Beskriving}
+\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbol}
+\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Side}
+\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symbol}
+\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Tal}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\iffalse
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</glossaries-dictionary-Nynorsk.dict>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%\Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/glossaries-nynorsk.ins b/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/glossaries-nynorsk.ins
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ab784f1c28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/glossaries-nynorsk.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+% glossaries-english.ins generated using makedtx version 1.1 2014/11/24 18:20
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+ glossaries-nynorsk.dtx
+ Copyright 2020 Eirik Haustveit
+
+
+ Based on package by Nicola Talbot
+
+ This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+ conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+ of this license of (at your option) any later version.
+ The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+ and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+ version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+ This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+
+ The Current Maintainer of this work is Eirik Haustveit.
+
+ This work consists of the files glossaries-nynorsk.dtx and glossaries-nynorsk.ins and the derived files glossaries-nynorsk.ldf, glossaries-dictionary-Nynorsk.dict.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\askforoverwritefalse
+
+\generate{\file{glossaries-nynorsk.ldf}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
+\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries-nynorsk.dtx}{glossaries-nynorsk.ldf,package}}
+\file{glossaries-dictionary-Nynorsk.dict}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
+\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries-nynorsk.dtx}{glossaries-dictionary-Nynorsk.dict,package}}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/glossaries-nynorsk.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/glossaries-nynorsk.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4373d7d000
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-nynorsk/glossaries-nynorsk.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.md b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.md
index 208820190f..5432d88e7d 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.md
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.md
@@ -1,13 +1,12 @@
# README for hyperref bundle
-2020-01-14
+Version 2020-05-15 v7.00e
## INTRODUCTION
-
This package is used to emend cross-referencing commands in LaTeX to
-produce some sort of \special commands; there are backends for the
-\special set defined for HyperTeX dvi processors, for embedded pdfmark
+produce some sort of `\special` commands; there are backends for the
+`\special` set defined for HyperTeX dvi processors, for embedded pdfmark
commands for processing by Acrobat Distiller (dvips and dvipsone), for
dviwindo, for pdfTeX, for dvipdfm, for TeX4ht, and for VTEX's pdf and HTML
backends.
@@ -17,36 +16,32 @@ Included are:
1. `hyperref` The main hyperlinking functionality.
2. `backref` a package by David Carlisle to provide links back from
bibliography to the main text; these are hypertext links after using
- hyperref.
+ `hyperref`.
3. `nameref` a package to allow reference to the *names* of sections rather
than their numbers.
## DOWNLOAD
+`hyperref` is available on CTAN:https://ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
-`hyperref` is available on CTAN:
- https://ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
-
Also a ZIP file is provided that contains the files, already sorted
in a TDS tree:
- CTAN:install/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref.tds.zip
-
+ CTAN:http://mirrors.ctan.org/install/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref.tds.zip
+
"CTAN:" means one of the 'Comprehensive TeX Archive Network'
nodes or one of its mirrors. This is explained in
https://texfaq.org/FAQ-archives
-
+
The main repository of hyperref is located at github
- https://github.com/latex3/hyperref
-
+ https://github.com/latex3/hyperref
## INSTALLATION
-
### Installation with ZIP file in TDS format
-The ZIP file `hyperref.tds.zip` contains the files sorted
-in a TDS tree. Thus you can directly unpack the ZIP file
-inside a TDS tree. (See CTAN:tds.zip for an explanation of TDS.)
+The ZIP file [hyperref.tds.zip](http://mirrors.ctan.org/install/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref.tds.zip)
+contains the files sorted in a TDS tree. Thus you can directly unpack the ZIP file
+inside a TDS tree. (See [CTAN:tds.zip](https://ctan.org/pkg/tds) for an explanation of TDS.)
Example:
```
@@ -54,42 +49,38 @@ Example:
unzip /...downloadpath.../hyperref.tds.zip
```
-Do not forget to refresh the file name database of this TDS tree,
-Example:
+Do not forget to refresh the file name database of this TDS tree.
+Example for TeXLive:
```
- texhash /...somewhere.../texmf
+ mktexlsr /...somewhere.../texmf
```
### Manual installation
1. Download the hyperref files from CTAN or the TUG server.
If necessary, unpack them.
- 2. Generate the package and driver files:
- tex hyperref.ins
+ 2. Generate the package and driver files: `tex hyperref.ins`
3. Install the files `*.sty`, `*.def`, and `*.cfg` in your TDS tree:
- cp *.sty *.def *.cfg TDS:tex/latex/hyperref/
- Replace `TDS:` by the prefix of your TDS tree (texmf directory).
- The exception is bmhydoc.sty, it belongs to the source files
- (TDS:source/latex/hyperref/).
- 4. Copy the documentation files to "TDS:doc/latex/hyperref/":
+ `cp *.sty *.def *.cfg TDS:tex/latex/hyperref/`.
+ Replace `TDS:` by the prefix of your TDS tree (`texmf` directory).
+ The exception is `bmhydoc.sty`, it belongs to the source files
+ (`TDS:source/latex/hyperref/`).
+ 4. Copy the documentation files to "`TDS:doc/latex/hyperref/`":
manual.pdf, README.md, ChangeLog.txt,
slides.pdf, paper.pdf, hyperref.pdf, backref.pdf,
- nameref.pdf (Also the HTML version of the manual can be put there.)
- 5. Update the databases if necessary, eg. for texlive:
- mktexlsr .../texmf
-
-## AUTHORS/MAINTAINERS
+ nameref.pdf (Also the HTML version of the manual can be put there).
+ 5. Update the databases if necessary, eg. for TeXLive:
+ `mktexlsr .../texmf`
+## AUTHORS/MAINTAINERS
* Sebastian Rahtz (died 2016)
* Heiko Oberdiek (inactive)
* The LaTeX3 Project
-
## BUG REPORTS
-
A bug report should contain:
* Comprehensive problem description. This includes error or
@@ -100,35 +91,33 @@ A bug report should contain:
contain any unnecessary packages and code.
* Used drivers/programs.
* Version information about used packages and programs.
- * If you are using LaTeX, then add "\listfiles". Then
+ * If you are using LaTeX, then add "`\listfiles`". Then
a list of version informations is printed at the end
of the LaTeX run.
* Please no other files than the minimal test file.
The other files .log, .dvi, .ps, .pdf are seldom necessary,
so send them only on request.
-
+
## Bug address
A bug tracker is available at github:
https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues
-
## Vietnamese part
Responsible for the Vietnamese translations of the
\autoref names and puvnenc.def are:
- Han The Thanh <hanthethanh [at] gmail [dot] com>
- Reinhard Kotucha <reinhard [dot] kotucha at web [dot] de>
-
+
+- Han The Thanh `<hanthethanh [at] gmail [dot] com>`
+- Reinhard Kotucha `<reinhard [dot] kotucha at web [dot] de>`
+
## Arabic part
Responsible for the additions to PU encoding for Arabi is
- Youssef Jabri <yjabri [at] ensa [dot] univ-oujda [dot] ac [dot] ma>
-
+ Youssef Jabri `<yjabri [at] ensa [dot] univ-oujda [dot] ac [dot] ma>`
## KNOWN PROBLEMS
-
* (half-done) hyper images (link from thumbnail in text)
* Relative links are not sorted out or documented well.
For PDF generation:
@@ -142,7 +131,6 @@ Responsible for the additions to PU encoding for Arabi is
\endgroup
```
* ...
-
## TODO
@@ -157,4 +145,3 @@ Responsible for the additions to PU encoding for Arabi is
nested links. The start positions should be remembered in a stack,
but there are complications with page breaks.
* ...
-
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/backref.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/backref.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 807fc4170d..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/backref.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/backref.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/backref.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7cb9b13808
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/backref.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/hyperref.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/hyperref.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1ac908174f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/hyperref.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.css b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.css
index b857e3efd7..c56985d497 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.css
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.css
@@ -17,36 +17,36 @@
.ec-lmss-17{ font-family: sans-serif;}
.ec-lmss-17{ font-family: sans-serif;}
.ec-lmr-12{font-size:120%;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{font-size:120%; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{font-size:120%; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
.ec-lmss-10{ font-family: sans-serif;}
.ec-lmss-10{ font-family: sans-serif;}
.ec-lmss-10{ font-family: sans-serif;}
@@ -64,21 +64,21 @@
.ec-lmss-10{ font-family: sans-serif;}
.ec-lmr-9{font-size:90%;}
.ec-lmr-8{font-size:80%;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{font-size:80%; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{font-size:80%; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtt-10x-x-80{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;}
.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;}
.ec-lmri-10{ font-style:italic;}
@@ -125,36 +125,36 @@
.ec-lmss-8{ font-family: sans-serif;}
.ec-lmss-8{ font-family: sans-serif;}
.ec-lmss-8{ font-family: sans-serif;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
-.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtk-10{ font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
+.ec-lmvtto-10{ font-style: oblique; font-family: monospace,monospace;}
p{margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0}
p.indent{text-indent:0;}
p + p{margin-top:1em;}
@@ -219,11 +219,6 @@ table[rules] {border-left:solid black 0.4pt; border-right:solid black 0.4pt; }
.hline td, .cline td{ padding: 0; }
.hline hr, .cline hr{border:none;border-top:1px solid black;}
.tabbing-right {text-align:right;}
-span.TEX {letter-spacing: -0.125em; }
-span.TEX span.E{ position:relative;top:0.5ex;left:-0.0417em;}
-a span.TEX span.E {text-decoration: none; }
-span.LATEX span.A{ position:relative; top:-0.5ex; left:-0.4em; font-size:85%;}
-span.LATEX span.TEX{ position:relative; left: -0.4em; }
div.float, div.figure {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
div.float img {text-align:center;}
div.figure img {text-align:center;}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.html b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.html
index 4a4f4ab6d8..5dc0901e62 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.html
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.html
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
<html >
<head><title>Hypertext marks in LATEX: a manual for hyperref</title>
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
-<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
-<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
<!-- html -->
<meta name="src" content="manual.tex">
<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="manual.css">
@@ -20,19 +20,12 @@
<div class="author" ><span
class="ec-lmr-12">Sebastian Rahtz (deceased)</span><br class="and" /><span
class="ec-lmr-12">Heiko Oberdiek (inactive)</span><br class="and" /><span
-class="ec-lmr-12">The </span><span class="LATEX"><span
-class="ec-lmr-12">L</span><span class="A"><span
-class="ec-lmr-12">A</span></span><span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmr-12">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmr-12">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmr-12">X</span></span></span><span
-class="ec-lmr-12">3 Project (</span><a
+class="ec-lmr-12">The LaTeX3 Project (</span><a
href="https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues" class="url" ><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10x-x-120">https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues</span></a><span
class="ec-lmr-12">)</span></div><br />
<div class="date" ><span
-class="ec-lmr-12">January 2020</span></div>
+class="ec-lmr-12">2020-05-15 v7.00e</span></div>
</div>
<h3 class="likesectionHead"><a
id="x1-1000"></a>Contents</h3>
@@ -372,10 +365,8 @@ correctly.
<!--l. 231--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="ec-lmri-10">href </span>and <span
class="ec-lmri-10">name </span>commands must be paired with an <span
-class="ec-lmri-10">end </span>command later in the <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;file&#8212;the
-<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;commands between the two ends of a pair form an <span
+class="ec-lmri-10">end </span>command later in the TeX&#x00A0;file&#8212;the
+TeX&#x00A0;commands between the two ends of a pair form an <span
class="ec-lmri-10">anchor </span>in the document. In the case of an <span
class="ec-lmri-10">href</span>
command, the <span
@@ -405,17 +396,12 @@ options; at present, the following drivers are supported:
<dl class="description"><dt class="description">
<span
class="ec-lmbx-10">hypertex</span> </dt><dd
-class="description">DVI processors conforming to the Hyper<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;guidelines (i.e.&#x00A0;<span
+class="description">DVI processors conforming to the HyperTeX&#x00A0;guidelines (i.e.&#x00A0;<span
class="ec-lmss-10">xdvi</span>, <span
class="ec-lmss-10">dvips </span>(with the <span
class="ec-lmss-10">-z</span>
option), <span
-class="ec-lmss-10">Oz</span><span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">X</span></span>, and <span
+class="ec-lmss-10">OzTeX</span>, and <span
class="ec-lmss-10">Textures</span>)
</dd><dt class="description">
<span
@@ -441,24 +427,16 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">dvips</span>, but a few variations remained before
<span
class="ec-lmbx-10">tex4ht</span> </dt><dd
class="description">produces <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">\special</span></span></span> commands for use with <span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">X</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">4ht</span>
+class="ec-lmvtt-10">\special</span></span></span> commands for use with <span
+class="ec-lmss-10">TeX4ht</span>
</dd><dt class="description">
<span
class="ec-lmbx-10">pdftex</span> </dt><dd
-class="description">pdf<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>, Hàn Thê´ Thành&#8217;s <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span> variant that writes PDF directly
+class="description">pdfTeX, Hàn Thê´ Thành&#8217;s TeX variant that writes PDF directly
</dd><dt class="description">
<span
class="ec-lmbx-10">luatex</span> </dt><dd
-class="description">lua<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>, Unicode <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span> variant that writes PDF directly
+class="description">luaTeX, Unicode TeX variant that writes PDF directly
</dd><dt class="description">
<span
class="ec-lmbx-10">dvipdfm</span> </dt><dd
@@ -482,8 +460,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\special</span></span></span> commands that Y&amp;Y&#8217;s
<span
class="ec-lmbx-10">vtex</span> </dt><dd
class="description">produces <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">\special</span></span></span> commands that MicroPress&#8217; HTML and PDF-producing <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;variants
+class="ec-lmvtt-10">\special</span></span></span> commands that MicroPress&#8217; HTML and PDF-producing TeX&#x00A0;variants
interpret as hypertext jumps within the previewer
</dd><dt class="description">
<span
@@ -496,8 +473,7 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">Textures </span>interprets as hypertext jumps within the
<span
class="ec-lmbx-10">xetex</span> </dt><dd
class="description">produces <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">\special</span></span></span> commands for Xe<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></dd></dl>
+class="ec-lmvtt-10">\special</span></span></span> commands for XeTeX</dd></dl>
<!--l. 273--><p class="indent" > Output from <span
class="ec-lmss-10">dvips </span>or <span
class="ec-lmss-10">dvipsone </span>must be processed using Acrobat Distiller to obtain a PDF
@@ -508,8 +484,7 @@ The result is generally preferable to that produced by using the <span
class="ec-lmss-10">hypertex </span>driver, and then
processing with <span
class="ec-lmss-10">dvips -z</span>, but the DVI file is not portable. The main advantage of using the
-Hyper<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;<span
+HyperTeX&#x00A0;<span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\special </span>commands is that you can also use the document in hypertext DVI viewers, such as
<span
class="ec-lmss-10">xdvi</span>.
@@ -526,13 +501,10 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">driverfallback=dvipdfm</span></div>
class="ec-lmss-10">pdftex</span>, <span
class="ec-lmss-10">xetex</span>, <span
class="ec-lmss-10">vtex</span>, <span
-class="ec-lmss-10">vtexpdfmark</span>) are recognized from within <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;and
+class="ec-lmss-10">vtexpdfmark</span>) are recognized from within TeX&#x00A0;and
therefore cannot be given as value to option <span
class="ec-lmss-10">driverfallback</span>. However a DVI driver program is run
- after the <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;run is finished. Thus it cannot be detected at <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;macro level. Then package
+ after the TeX&#x00A0;run is finished. Thus it cannot be detected at TeX&#x00A0;macro level. Then package
<span
class="ec-lmss-10">hyperref </span>uses the driver, given by <span
class="ec-lmss-10">driverfallback</span>. If the driver is already specified or can be
@@ -541,9 +513,8 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">driverfallback </span>is ignored.</dd></dl>
<h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2 </span> <a
id="x1-30002"></a>Implicit behavior</h3>
-<!--l. 304--><p class="noindent" >This package can be used with more or less any normal <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;document by specifying in the
-document preamble
+<!--l. 304--><p class="noindent" >This package can be used with more or less any normal LaTeX&#x00A0;document by specifying in the document
+preamble
<div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-1">
@@ -552,11 +523,10 @@ document preamble
<!--l. 309--><p class="nopar" >
<!--l. 311--><p class="indent" > Make sure it comes <span
class="ec-lmri-10">last </span>of your loaded packages, to give it a fighting chance of not being over-written,
-since its job is to redefine many <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;commands. Hopefully you will find that all cross-references
-work correctly as hypertext. For example, <span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">\section </span>commands will produce a bookmark and a link,
-whereas <span
+since its job is to redefine many LaTeX&#x00A0;commands. Hopefully you will find that all cross-references work
+correctly as hypertext. For example, <span
+class="ec-lmvtt-10">\section </span>commands will produce a bookmark and a link, whereas
+<span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\section* </span>commands will only show links when paired with a corresponding <span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\addcontentsline</span>
command.
@@ -621,11 +591,9 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">hyperref.cfg</span>:
</div>
<!--l. 367--><p class="nopar" ></li></ul>
<!--l. 370--><p class="indent" > As seen in the previous example, information entries (pdftitle, pdfauthor, &#x2026;) should be set after the
-package is loaded. Otherwise <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;expands the values of these options prematurely. Also
-<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;strips spaces in options. Especially option &#8216;pdfborder&#8217; requires some care. Curly braces protect
-the value, if given as package option. They are not necessary in <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+package is loaded. Otherwise LaTeX&#x00A0;expands the values of these options prematurely. Also LaTeX&#x00A0;strips
+spaces in options. Especially option &#8216;pdfborder&#8217; requires some care. Curly braces protect the value, if
+given as package option. They are not necessary in <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hypersetup</span></span></span>.
@@ -634,8 +602,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hypersetup</span></span></span>.
&#x00A0;<br />\hypersetup{pdfborder=0&#x00A0;0&#x00A0;0}
</div>
<!--l. 380--><p class="nopar" >
-<!--l. 382--><p class="indent" > Package &#8216;kvoptions-patch&#8217; patches <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;to make it aware of key value options and to prevent
+<!--l. 382--><p class="indent" > Package &#8216;kvoptions-patch&#8217; patches LaTeX&#x00A0;to make it aware of key value options and to prevent
premature value expansions.
<!--l. 385--><p class="indent" > Some options can be given at any time, but many are restricted: before <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\begin{document}</span></span></span>, only in
@@ -701,8 +668,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">implicit </span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; te
class="td11"> boolean </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-6-3"
class="td11"> <span
class="ec-lmri-10">true </span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-6-4"
-class="td11"> redefines <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;internals </td>
+class="td11"> redefines LaTeX&#x00A0;internals </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-7-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-7-1"
class="td11"> <span
@@ -940,8 +906,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">naturalnames </span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap;
class="td11"> boolean </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-3-4-3"
class="td11"> <span
class="ec-lmri-10">false </span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-3-4-4"
-class="td11"> use <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>-computed names for links </td>
+class="td11"> use LaTeX-computed names for links </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-3-5-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-3-5-1"
class="td11"> <span
@@ -1060,13 +1025,8 @@ wrong and displaced.
<!--l. 578--><p class="noindent" >If no driver is specified, the package tries to find a driver in the following order:
<ol class="enumerate1" >
<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-8002x1">Autodetection, some <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;processors can be detected at <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;macro level (pdf<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>,
- Xe<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>, V<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>).
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-8002x1">Autodetection, some TeX&#x00A0;processors can be detected at TeX&#x00A0;macro level (pdfTeX, XeTeX,
+ VTeX).
</li>
<li
class="enumerate" id="x1-8004x2">Option <span
@@ -1152,8 +1112,7 @@ class="td01"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">hypertex </span></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-5-8-2"
class="td10">
<!--l. 602--><p class="noindent" >Sets up <span
-class="ec-lmss-10">hyperref </span>for use with the Hyper<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>-compliant drivers. </td>
+class="ec-lmss-10">hyperref </span>for use with the HyperTeX-compliant drivers. </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-5-9-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-5-9-1"
class="td01"><span
@@ -1196,12 +1155,8 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">dvips</span>.
class="td01"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">tex4ht </span></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-5-14-2"
class="td10">
- <!--l. 610--><p class="noindent" >For use with <span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">X</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">4ht</span> </td>
+ <!--l. 610--><p class="noindent" >For use with <span
+class="ec-lmss-10">TeX4ht</span> </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-5-15-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-5-15-1"
class="td01"><span
@@ -1229,8 +1184,7 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">VTeX</span>&#8217;s PostScript backend.
class="td01"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">xetex </span></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-5-18-2"
class="td10">
- <!--l. 615--><p class="noindent" >For use with Xe<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;(using backend for dvipdfm). </td>
+ <!--l. 615--><p class="noindent" >For use with XeTeX&#x00A0;(using backend for dvipdfm). </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-5-19-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-5-19-1"
class="td01"> </td>
@@ -1518,8 +1472,7 @@ class="td01"> </td>
class="td01"> </td></tr>
</table></div>
<!--l. 668--><p class="noindent" >Note that all color names must be defined before use, following the normal system of the standard
-<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;<span
+LaTeX&#x00A0;<span
class="ec-lmss-10">color </span>package.
<!--l. 671--><p class="noindent" >
<h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.6 </span> <a
@@ -1542,17 +1495,14 @@ class="ec-lmri-10">true </span></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-ali
class="td10">
<!--l. 673--><p class="noindent" >A set of Acrobat bookmarks are written, in a
manner similar to the table of contents, requiring
- two passes of <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>. Some postprocessing of
+ two passes of LaTeX. Some postprocessing of
the bookmark file (file extension <span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">.out</span>) may
- be needed to translate <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;codes, since
+ be needed to translate LaTeX&#x00A0;codes, since
bookmarks must be written in PDFEncoding. To
aid this process, the <span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">.out </span>file is not rewritten
- by <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;if it is edited to contain a line
+ by LaTeX&#x00A0;if it is edited to contain a line
<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\let\WriteBookmarks\relax</span></span></span> </td>
</tr><tr
@@ -1726,8 +1676,7 @@ class="td10"></td></tr>
</table></div>
<!--l. 714--><p class="noindent" >Note that the color of link borders can be specified <span
class="ec-lmri-10">only </span>as 3 numbers in the range 0..1, giving an RGB
-color. You cannot use colors defined in <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>. Since version 6.76a this is no longer true. Especially with
+color. You cannot use colors defined in TeX. Since version 6.76a this is no longer true. Especially with
the help of package <span
class="ec-lmss-10">xcolor </span>the usual color specifications of package <span
class="ec-lmss-10">(x)color </span>can be used. For further
@@ -1738,11 +1687,9 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">hycolor</span>.
<!--l. 721--><p class="indent" > The bookmark commands are stored in a file called <span
class="ec-lmri-10">jobname</span><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">.out</span>. The files is not processed by
-<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;so any markup is passed through. You can postprocess this file as needed; as an aid
+LaTeX&#x00A0;so any markup is passed through. You can postprocess this file as needed; as an aid
for this, the <span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">.out </span>file is not overwritten on the next <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;run if it is edited to contain the
+class="ec-lmvtt-10">.out </span>file is not overwritten on the next TeX&#x00A0;run if it is edited to contain the
line
@@ -1896,7 +1843,8 @@ class="td11"> <span
class="ec-lmri-10">1 </span></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-8-12-4"
class="td10">
<!--l. 750--><p class="noindent" >Determines on which page the PDF file is
- opened. </td>
+ opened. An empty value means, the entry is
+ not set. </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-8-13-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-8-13-1"
class="td01"><span
@@ -2275,12 +2223,10 @@ class="td01"> </td>
class="td01"> </td></tr>
</table></div>
<!--l. 814--><p class="noindent" >Each link in Acrobat carries its own magnification level, which is set using PDF coordinate space, which
-is not the same as <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#8217;s. The unit is bp and the origin is in the lower left corner. See also <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+is not the same as TeX&#8217;s. The unit is bp and the origin is in the lower left corner. See also <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hypercalcbp</span></span></span>
that is explained on page <a
-href="#x1-180004.2">47<!--tex4ht:ref: hypercalcbp --></a>. pdf<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;works by supplying default values for <span
+href="#x1-180004.2">47<!--tex4ht:ref: hypercalcbp --></a>. pdfTeX&#x00A0;works by supplying default values for <span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">XYZ </span>(horizontal <span
class="lmsy-10">&#x00D7;</span>
vertical <span
@@ -2924,11 +2870,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">hypertex </span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap
class="td11"> </td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-37-3"
class="td10">
<!--l. 945--><p class="noindent" >use <span
-class="ec-lmss-10">Hyper</span><span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">X</span></span> backend </td>
+class="ec-lmss-10">HyperTeX </span>backend </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-12-38-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-38-1"
class="td01"><span
@@ -2944,22 +2886,15 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">implicit </span></td><td style="white-space:nowr
class="td11"> <span
class="ec-lmri-10">true </span></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-39-3"
class="td10">
- <!--l. 947--><p class="noindent" >redefine <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;internals </td>
+ <!--l. 947--><p class="noindent" >redefine LaTeX&#x00A0;internals </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-12-40-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-40-1"
class="td01"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">latex2html </span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-40-2"
class="td11"> </td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-40-3"
class="td10">
- <!--l. 948--><p class="noindent" >use <span class="LATEX"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">L</span><span class="A"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">A</span></span><span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">X</span></span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">2HTML </span>backend </td>
+ <!--l. 948--><p class="noindent" >use <span
+class="ec-lmss-10">LaTeX2HTML </span>backend </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-12-41-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-41-1"
class="td01"><span
@@ -3028,8 +2963,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">naturalnames </span></td><td style="white-space:nowr
class="td11"> <span
class="ec-lmri-10">false </span></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-49-3"
class="td10">
- <!--l. 956--><p class="noindent" >use <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>-computed names for links </td>
+ <!--l. 956--><p class="noindent" >use LaTeX-computed names for links </td>
</tr><tr
@@ -3359,11 +3293,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">pdftex </span></td><td style="white-space
class="td11"> </td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-91-3"
class="td10">
<!--l. 1001--><p class="noindent" >use <span
-class="ec-lmss-10">pdf</span><span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">X</span></span> backend </td>
+class="ec-lmss-10">pdfTeX </span>backend </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-12-92-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-92-1"
class="td01"><span
@@ -3458,11 +3388,7 @@ class="td11"> <span
class="ec-lmri-10">false </span></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-102-3"
class="td10">
<!--l. 1014--><p class="noindent" >raise up links (for <span
-class="ec-lmss-10">Hyper</span><span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">X</span></span> backend) </td>
+class="ec-lmss-10">HyperTeX </span>backend) </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-12-103-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-103-1"
class="td01"><span
@@ -3496,12 +3422,8 @@ class="td01"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">tex4ht </span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-107-2"
class="td11"> </td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-107-3"
class="td10">
- <!--l. 1018--><p class="noindent" >use <span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">X</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">4ht </span>backend </td>
+ <!--l. 1018--><p class="noindent" >use <span
+class="ec-lmss-10">TeX4ht </span>backend </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-12-108-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-108-1"
class="td01"><span
@@ -3519,16 +3441,8 @@ class="ec-lmri-10">false </span></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-
class="td10">
<!--l. 1020--><p class="noindent" >Unicode encoded pdf strings, by defaut true
with <span
-class="ec-lmss-10">Xe</span><span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">X</span></span> and <span
-class="ec-lmss-10">Lu</span><span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">X</span></span> </td>
+class="ec-lmss-10">XeTeX </span>and <span
+class="ec-lmss-10">LuTeX</span> </td>
</tr><tr
@@ -3570,11 +3484,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">xetex </span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap
class="td11"> </td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-114-3"
class="td10">
<!--l. 1025--><p class="noindent" >use <span
-class="ec-lmss-10">Xe</span><span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmss-10">X</span></span> backend </td>
+class="ec-lmss-10">XeTeX </span>backend </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-12-115-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-12-115-1"
class="td01"> </td>
@@ -4137,12 +4047,8 @@ class="td11"> <span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\pdfstringdef</span><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">{</span></span></span><span
class="ec-lmri-10">macroname</span><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">}{</span></span></span><span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmri-10">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmri-10">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmri-10">X</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmri-10">string</span><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ec-lmvtt-10">}{</span></span></span><span
+class="ec-lmri-10">TeXstring</span><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">}</span></span></span> </td>
</tr></table> </div></span>
<!--l. 1279--><p class="indent" > <span
@@ -4156,8 +4062,7 @@ local:
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\345</span></span></span>): <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\edef\3{\string\3}</span></span></span>
</li>
- <li class="itemize">Special glyphs of <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>: <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+ <li class="itemize">Special glyphs of TeX: <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\{</span></span></span>, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\%</span></span></span>, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\&amp;</span></span></span>, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
@@ -4182,16 +4087,14 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\discretionary</span></span></span>, <span class="obeylines-
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\def</span></span></span>, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\let</span></span></span>, etc.
</li>
- <li class="itemize"><span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#8217;s font commands like <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+ <li class="itemize">LaTeX&#8217;s font commands like <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\textbf</span></span></span>, etc.
</li>
<li class="itemize">Support for <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\xspace</span></span></span> provided by the <span
class="ec-lmss-10">xspace </span>package</li></ul>
<!--l. 1295--><p class="indent" > In addition, parentheses are protected to avoid the danger of unsafe unbalanced parentheses in
-the PDF string. For further details, see Heiko Oberdiek&#8217;s Euro<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;paper distributed with
+the PDF string. For further details, see Heiko Oberdiek&#8217;s EuroTeX&#x00A0;paper distributed with
<span
class="ec-lmss-10">hyperref</span>.
<!--l. 1299--><p class="noindent" >
@@ -4294,8 +4197,7 @@ class="ec-lmbx-10">Hint: </span>Package <span
class="ec-lmss-10">bookmark </span>replaces <span
class="ec-lmss-10">hyperref</span>&#8217;s bookmark organization by a new algorithm:
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">Usually only one <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;run is needed.
+ <li class="itemize">Usually only one LaTeX&#x00A0;run is needed.
</li>
<li class="itemize">More control over the bookmark appearance (color, font).
</li>
@@ -4319,12 +4221,8 @@ id="TBL-37-1"></colgroup><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-37-1-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-37-1-1"
class="td11"> <span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\texorpdfstring</span><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">{</span></span></span><span class="TEX"><span
-class="ec-lmri-10">T</span><span
-class="E"><span
-class="ec-lmri-10">E</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmri-10">X</span></span><span
-class="ec-lmri-10">string</span><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ec-lmvtt-10">{</span></span></span><span
+class="ec-lmri-10">TeXstring</span><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">}{</span></span></span><span
class="ec-lmri-10">PDFstring</span><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">}</span></span></span> </td>
@@ -4386,8 +4284,7 @@ class="ec-lmri-10">dimen specification</span><span class="obeylines-h"><span cla
class="ec-lmvtt-10">}</span></span></span> </td>
</tr></table> </div></span>
<!--l. 1401--><p class="noindent" ><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hypercalcbp</span></span></span> takes a <span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;dimen specification and converts it to bp and returns the number
+class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hypercalcbp</span></span></span> takes a TeX&#x00A0;dimen specification and converts it to bp and returns the number
without the unit. This is useful for options <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">pdfview</span></span></span>, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">pdfstartview</span></span></span> and <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
@@ -4675,7 +4572,7 @@ provide a representation without accents instead of wrong accents:
<!--l. 1679--><p class="noindent" >
<h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">5.10 </span> <a
id="x1-290005.10"></a>Customizing index style file with \nohyperpage</h4>
-<!--l. 1681--><p class="noindent" >Since version 2008/08/14 v6.78f.
+<!--l. 1681--><p class="noindent" >Since version 2008/08/14&#x00A0;v6.78f.
<!--l. 1685--><p class="indent" > For hyperlink support in the index, hyperref inserts <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hyperpage</span></span></span> into the index macros. After
processing with Makeindex, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
@@ -5061,7 +4958,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\toclevel@&#x003C;name&#x003E;</span></span></span>. Example
class="ec-lmss-10">pdfescapeform</span></h4>
<!--l. 2049--><p class="noindent" >There are many places where arbitrary strings end up as PS or PDF strings. The PS/PDF strings in
parentheses form require the protection of some characters, e.g. unmatched left or right parentheses need
-escaping or the escape character itself (backslash). Since 2006/02/12 v6.75a the PS/PDF driver
+escaping or the escape character itself (backslash). Since 2006/02/12&#x00A0;v6.75a the PS/PDF driver
should do this automatically. However I assume a problem with compatibility, especially
regarding the form part where larger amounts of JavaScript code can be present. It would
be a pain to remove all the escaping, because an additional escaping layer can falsify the
@@ -6853,12 +6750,9 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\vpageref[]{...}</span></span></span> On the same page a pre
as unicode strings. Only if the string restricts to the printable ASCII set, it is written as ASCII string.
The reason is that the <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\special</span></span></span> does not support PDFDocEncoding.
-<!--l. 2989--><p class="indent" > XeTeX uses the program xdvipdfmx for PDF output generation. This program behaves a little
-different from dvipdfm, because of the supported Unicode characters. Strings for bookmarks or
-information entries can be output directly. The big chars (char code &#x003E; 255) are written in UTF-8 and
-xdvipdfmx tries to convert them to UTF-16BE. However hyperref already provides PDF strings encoded
-in UTF-16BE, thus the result is a warning
-<!--l. 2998--><p class="indent" > <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 2987--><p class="indent" > In older versions hyperref contained special conversion code from UTF-16BE back to UTF-8 in a
+number of places for xetex to avoid the xdvipdfmx warning
+<!--l. 2991--><p class="indent" > <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">Failed</span><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">&#x00A0;to</span><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">&#x00A0;convert</span><span
@@ -6866,42 +6760,20 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">&#x00A0;input</span><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">&#x00A0;string</span><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">&#x00A0;to</span><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">&#x00A0;UTF16...</span></span></span>
-<!--l. 3000--><p class="indent" > The best way would be, if xdvipdfm could detect the byte order marker (<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">\376\377</span></span></span>) and skips the
-conversion if that marker is present.
-<!--l. 3004--><p class="indent" > For the time being I added the following to hyperref, when option &#8216;pdfencoding=auto&#8217; is set (default
-for XeTeX): The string is converted back to big characters thus that the string is written as UTF-8. But
-I am very unhappy with this solution. Main disadvantage: Two versions of <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">\pdfstringdef</span></span></span> are
-needed:
-<!--l. 3011--><p class="indent" > a) The string is converted back to big characters for the &#8220;tainted key&#8221; of xdvipdfmx
-(<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">spc_pdfm.c:</span><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">&#x00A0;default_taintkeys</span></span></span>). The subset hyperref uses is /Title, /Author, /Subject,
-/Keywords, /Creator, /Producer, /T. Any changes of this set in xdvipdfmx cannot be detected by
-hyperref.
-<!--l. 3017--><p class="indent" > b) Without conversion for the other strings , providing UTF16be directly. Examples: Prefix of page
-labels, some elements of formulars.
-<!--l. 3021--><p class="indent" > Thus <span
-class="ec-lmbx-10">each </span>application that uses <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">\pdfstringdef</span></span></span> now must check, if it defines a string
-for some of the tained keys. If yes, then the call of <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">\pdfstringdef</span></span></span> should be preceded by
+<!--l. 2993--><p class="indent" > This is no longer needed with a current xdvipdfmx, so this code has been removed.
<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\csname</span><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">&#x00A0;HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue\endcsname</span></span></span>. Example: package bookmark.
-<!--l. 3029--><p class="noindent" >
+class="ec-lmvtt-10">&#x00A0;HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue\endcsname</span></span></span> should no longer be used.
+<!--l. 2999--><p class="noindent" >
<h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">10 </span> <a
id="x1-9700010"></a>Limitations<span class="footnote-mark"><a
href="manual6.html#fn5x0"><sup class="textsuperscript">5</sup></a></span><a
id="x1-97001f5"></a> </h3>
<h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">10.1 </span> <a
id="x1-9800010.1"></a>Wrapped/broken link support</h4>
-<!--l. 3032--><p class="noindent" >Only few drivers support automatically wrapped/broken links, e.g. pdftex, dvipdfm, hypertex. Other
+<!--l. 3002--><p class="noindent" >Only few drivers support automatically wrapped/broken links, e.g. pdftex, dvipdfm, hypertex. Other
drivers lack this feature, e.g. dvips, dvipsone.
-<!--l. 3036--><p class="indent" > Workarounds:
-
-
+<!--l. 3006--><p class="indent" > Workarounds:
<ul class="itemize1">
<li class="itemize">For long section or caption titles in the table of contents or list of figures/tables option
<span
@@ -6917,23 +6789,25 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">breakurl</span>.
class="ec-lmss-10">breaklinks </span>is intended for internal use. But it can be used to force link wrapping,
e.g. when printing a document. However, when such a document is converted to PDF and
viewed with a PDF viewer, the active link area will be misplaced.
- <!--l. 3050--><p class="noindent" >Another limitation: some penalties are &#8220;optimized&#8221; by TeX, thus there are missing break
+ <!--l. 3020--><p class="noindent" >Another limitation: some penalties are &#8220;optimized&#8221; by TeX, thus there are missing break
points, especially within <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\url</span></span></span>. (See thread &#8220;hyperref.sty, breaklinks and url.sty 3.2&#8221; in
comp.text.tex 2005-09).</li></ul>
-<!--l. 3056--><p class="noindent" >
+
+
+<!--l. 3026--><p class="noindent" >
<h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">10.2 </span> <a
id="x1-9900010.2"></a>Links across pages</h4>
-<!--l. 3058--><p class="noindent" >In general they have problems:
+<!--l. 3028--><p class="noindent" >In general they have problems:
<ul class="itemize1">
<li class="itemize">Some driver doesn&#8217;t support them at all (see above).
</li>
<li class="itemize">The driver allows it, but the link result might include the footer and/or header, or an error
message can occur sometimes.</li></ul>
-<!--l. 3066--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 3036--><p class="noindent" >
<h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">10.3 </span> <a
id="x1-10000010.3"></a>Footnotes</h4>
-<!--l. 3068--><p class="noindent" >LaTeX allows the separation of the footnote mark and the footnote text (<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 3038--><p class="noindent" >LaTeX allows the separation of the footnote mark and the footnote text (<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\footnotemark</span></span></span>,
<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\footnotetext</span></span></span>). This interface might be enough for visual typesetting. But the relation between
@@ -6946,17 +6820,17 @@ which <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\footnotemark</span></span></span> references which <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\footnotetext</span></span></span>. But that is necessary to implement hyperlinking.
Thus the implementation of hyperref does not support the optional argument of <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
-class="ec-lmvtt-10">\footnotemark\verb</span></span></span>
-and <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="ec-lmvtt-10">\footnotemark</span></span></span> and
+<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\footnotetext</span></span></span>.
-<!--l. 3079--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 3049--><p class="noindent" >
<h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">11 </span> <a
id="x1-10100011"></a>Hints<span class="footnote-mark"><a
href="manual7.html#fn6x0"><sup class="textsuperscript">6</sup></a></span><a
id="x1-101001f6"></a> </h3>
<h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">11.1 </span> <a
id="x1-10200011.1"></a>Spaces in option values</h4>
-<!--l. 3083--><p class="noindent" >Unhappily LaTeX strips spaces from options if they are given in <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 3053--><p class="noindent" >Unhappily LaTeX strips spaces from options if they are given in <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\documentclass</span></span></span> or <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\usepackage</span></span></span> (or
<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
@@ -6966,35 +6840,35 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\RequirePackage</span></span></span>), e.g.:
<div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-71">
&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\usepackage[pdfborder=0&#x00A0;0&#x00A0;1]{hyperref}
</div>
-<!--l. 3087--><p class="nopar" > Package hyperref now gets
+<!--l. 3057--><p class="nopar" > Package hyperref now gets
<div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-72">
&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;pdfborder=001
</div>
-<!--l. 3091--><p class="nopar" > and the result is an invalid PDF file. As workaround braces can be used:
+<!--l. 3061--><p class="nopar" > and the result is an invalid PDF file. As workaround braces can be used:
<div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-73">
&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\usepackage[pdfborder={0&#x00A0;0&#x00A0;1}]{hyperref}
</div>
-<!--l. 3096--><p class="nopar" > Some options can also be given in <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 3066--><p class="nopar" > Some options can also be given in <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hypersetup</span></span></span>
<div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-74">
&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\hypersetup{pdfborder=0&#x00A0;0&#x00A0;1}
</div>
-<!--l. 3100--><p class="nopar" > In <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 3070--><p class="nopar" > In <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hypersetup</span></span></span> the options are directly processed as key value options (see package keyval) without
space stripping in the value part.
-<!--l. 3106--><p class="indent" > Alternatively, LaTeX&#8217;s option handling system can be adapted to key value options by one of the
+<!--l. 3076--><p class="indent" > Alternatively, LaTeX&#8217;s option handling system can be adapted to key value options by one of the
packages <span
class="ec-lmss-10">kvoptions-patch </span>(from project <span
class="ec-lmss-10">kvoptions</span>) or <span
class="ec-lmss-10">xkvltxp </span>(from project <span
class="ec-lmss-10">xsetkeys</span>).
-<!--l. 3111--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 3081--><p class="noindent" >
<h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">11.2 </span> <a
id="x1-10300011.2"></a>Index with makeindex</h4>
<ul class="itemize1">
@@ -7024,7 +6898,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hyperpage</span></span></span> command. With
&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;...
&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\index{Some&#x00A0;example|main}
</div>
- <!--l. 3135--><p class="nopar" >
+ <!--l. 3105--><p class="nopar" >
</li>
<li class="itemize">Scientic Word/Scientific WorkPlace users can use package robustindex with hyperindex=false.
</li>
@@ -7035,7 +6909,7 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">encap</span>. Example for use of &#8220;?&#8221;:
<div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-76">
&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\usepackage[encap=?]{hyperref}
</div>
- <!--l. 3142--><p class="nopar" >
+ <!--l. 3112--><p class="nopar" >
</li>
<li class="itemize">Another possibility is the insertion of <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hyperpage</span></span></span> by a style file for makeindex. For this case,
@@ -7057,12 +6931,12 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hyperpage</span></span></span> will be defined regardless o
&#x00A0;<br />encap_suffix&#x00A0;"}"
&#x00A0;<br />%%%&#x00A0;cut&#x00A0;%%%&#x00A0;hyperindex.ist&#x00A0;%%%&#x00A0;cut&#x00A0;%%%
</div>
- <!--l. 3158--><p class="nopar" ></li></ul>
-<!--l. 3161--><p class="noindent" >
+ <!--l. 3128--><p class="nopar" ></li></ul>
+<!--l. 3131--><p class="noindent" >
<h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">11.3 </span> <a
id="x1-10400011.3"></a>Warning <span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">"bookmark level for unknown &#x003C;foobar&#x003E; defaults to 0"</span></h4>
-<!--l. 3163--><p class="noindent" >Getting rid of it:
+<!--l. 3133--><p class="noindent" >Getting rid of it:
<div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-78">
@@ -7070,16 +6944,16 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">"bookmark level for unknown &#x003C;foobar&#x003E; defaults
&#x00A0;<br />\providecommand*{\toclevel@&#x003C;foobar&#x003E;}{0}
&#x00A0;<br />\makeatother
</div>
-<!--l. 3168--><p class="nopar" >
-<!--l. 3170--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 3138--><p class="nopar" >
+<!--l. 3140--><p class="noindent" >
<h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">11.4 </span> <a
id="x1-10500011.4"></a>Link anchors in figures</h4>
-<!--l. 3172--><p class="noindent" >The caption command increments the counter and here is the place where hyperref set the corresponding
+<!--l. 3142--><p class="noindent" >The caption command increments the counter and here is the place where hyperref set the corresponding
anchor. Unhappily the caption is set below the figure, so the figure is not visible if a link jumps
to a figure. In this case, try package <span
class="ec-lmss-10">hypcap </span>that implements a method to circumvent the
problem.
-<!--l. 3180--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 3150--><p class="noindent" >
<h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">11.5 </span> <a
id="x1-10600011.5"></a>Additional unicode characters in bookmarks and pdf information entries:</h4>
@@ -7088,14 +6962,14 @@ problem.
\documentclass[pdftex]{article}
&#x00A0;<br />\usepackage[unicode]{hyperref}
</div>
-<!--l. 3184--><p class="nopar" >
-<!--l. 3186--><p class="indent" > Support for additional unicode characters:
-<!--l. 3188--><p class="indent" > Example: <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 3154--><p class="nopar" >
+<!--l. 3156--><p class="indent" > Support for additional unicode characters:
+<!--l. 3158--><p class="indent" > Example: <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\.{a}</span></span></span> and <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\d{a}</span></span></span>
-<!--l. 3190--><p class="indent" > 1. Get a list with unicode data, eg:
-<!--l. 3192--><p class="indent" > http://www.unicode.org/Public/UNIDATA/UnicodeData.txt
-<!--l. 3194--><p class="indent" > 2. Identify the characters (<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 3160--><p class="indent" > 1. Get a list with unicode data, eg:
+<!--l. 3162--><p class="indent" > http://www.unicode.org/Public/UNIDATA/UnicodeData.txt
+<!--l. 3164--><p class="indent" > 2. Identify the characters (<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\.{a}</span></span></span>, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\d{a}</span></span></span>):
@@ -7104,9 +6978,9 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\d{a}</span></span></span>):
&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;0227;LATIN&#x00A0;SMALL&#x00A0;LETTER&#x00A0;A&#x00A0;WITH&#x00A0;DOT&#x00A0;ABOVE;...
&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;1EA1;LATIN&#x00A0;SMALL&#x00A0;LETTER&#x00A0;A&#x00A0;WITH&#x00A0;DOT&#x00A0;BELOW;...
</div>
-<!--l. 3198--><p class="nopar" >
-<!--l. 3200--><p class="indent" > 3. Calculate the octal code:
-<!--l. 3202--><p class="indent" > The first characters of the line in the file are hex values, convert each byte and prepend them with a
+<!--l. 3168--><p class="nopar" >
+<!--l. 3170--><p class="indent" > 3. Calculate the octal code:
+<!--l. 3172--><p class="indent" > The first characters of the line in the file are hex values, convert each byte and prepend them with a
backslash. (This will go into the PDF file.)
@@ -7114,9 +6988,9 @@ backslash. (This will go into the PDF file.)
&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;0227&#x00A0;-&#x003E;&#x00A0;\002\047
&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;1EA1&#x00A0;-&#x003E;&#x00A0;\036\241
</div>
-<!--l. 3209--><p class="nopar" >
-<!--l. 3211--><p class="indent" > 4. Transform into a form understood by hyperref:
-<!--l. 3213--><p class="indent" > Hyperref must know where the first byte starts, this is marked by <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 3179--><p class="nopar" >
+<!--l. 3181--><p class="indent" > 4. Transform into a form understood by hyperref:
+<!--l. 3183--><p class="indent" > Hyperref must know where the first byte starts, this is marked by <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">9</span></span></span> (8 and 9 cannot occur in octal
numbers):
@@ -7125,8 +6999,8 @@ numbers):
&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\002\047&#x00A0;-&#x003E;&#x00A0;\9002\047
&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\036\241&#x00A0;-&#x003E;&#x00A0;\9036\241
</div>
-<!--l. 3220--><p class="nopar" >
-<!--l. 3222--><p class="indent" > Optional: <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 3190--><p class="nopar" >
+<!--l. 3192--><p class="indent" > Optional: <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">8</span></span></span> is used for abbreviations:
@@ -7135,8 +7009,8 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">8</span></span></span> is used for abbreviations:
&#x00A0;<br />
&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\9002\047&#x00A0;-&#x003E;&#x00A0;\82\047
</div>
-<!--l. 3228--><p class="nopar" >
-<!--l. 3230--><p class="indent" > 5. Declare the character with LaTeX:
+<!--l. 3198--><p class="nopar" >
+<!--l. 3200--><p class="indent" > 5. Declare the character with LaTeX:
<div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-84">
@@ -7148,11 +7022,11 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">8</span></span></span> is used for abbreviations:
&#x00A0;<br />\end{document}
&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;
</div>
-<!--l. 3239--><p class="nopar" >
-<!--l. 3241--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 3209--><p class="nopar" >
+<!--l. 3211--><p class="noindent" >
<h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">11.6 </span> <a
id="x1-10700011.6"></a>Footnotes</h4>
-<!--l. 3243--><p class="noindent" >The footnote support is rather limited. It is beyond the scope to use <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 3213--><p class="noindent" >The footnote support is rather limited. It is beyond the scope to use <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\footnotemark</span></span></span> and <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\footnotetext</span></span></span>
out of order or reusing <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
@@ -7210,12 +7084,12 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">hyperfootnotes=false</span></span></span> or fiddle with int
&#x00A0;<br />
&#x00A0;<br />\end{document}
</div>
-<!--l. 3297--><p class="nopar" >
+<!--l. 3267--><p class="nopar" >
-<!--l. 3299--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 3269--><p class="noindent" >
<h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">11.7 </span> <a
id="x1-10800011.7"></a>Subordinate counters</h4>
-<!--l. 3301--><p class="noindent" >Some counters do not have unique values and require the value of other counters to be unique. For
+<!--l. 3271--><p class="noindent" >Some counters do not have unique values and require the value of other counters to be unique. For
example, sections or figures might be numbered within chapters or <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\newtheorem</span></span></span> is used with an
optional counter argument. Internally LaTeX uses <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
@@ -7224,13 +7098,13 @@ another counter. Package hyperref hooks into <span class="obeylines-h"><span cla
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\@addtoreset</span></span></span> to catch this situation. Also <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\numberwithin</span></span></span>
of package amsmath is caught by hyperref.
-<!--l. 3311--><p class="indent" > However, if the definition of subordinate counters take place before hyperref is loaded, the old
+<!--l. 3281--><p class="indent" > However, if the definition of subordinate counters take place before hyperref is loaded, the old
meaning of <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\@addtoreset</span></span></span> is called without hyperref&#8217;s additions. Then the companion counter macro
<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\theH&#x003C;counter&#x003E;</span></span></span> can be redefined accordingly. Or move the definition of subordinate counters after
hyperref is loaded.
-<!--l. 3317--><p class="indent" > Example for <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 3287--><p class="indent" > Example for <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="ec-lmvtt-10">\newtheorem</span></span></span>, problematic case:
@@ -7238,14 +7112,14 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\newtheorem</span></span></span>, problematic case:
&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section]
&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\usepackage{hyperref}
</div>
-<!--l. 3321--><p class="nopar" > Solution a)
+<!--l. 3291--><p class="nopar" > Solution a)
<div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-87">
&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\usepackage{hyperref}
&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section}
</div>
-<!--l. 3326--><p class="nopar" > Solution b)
+<!--l. 3296--><p class="nopar" > Solution b)
<div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-88">
@@ -7253,11 +7127,11 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\newtheorem</span></span></span>, problematic case:
&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\usepackage{hyperref}
&#x00A0;<br />&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;&#x00A0;\newcommand*{\theHcorA}{\theHsection.\number\value{corA}}
</div>
-<!--l. 3332--><p class="nopar" >
-<!--l. 3334--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 3302--><p class="nopar" >
+<!--l. 3304--><p class="noindent" >
<h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">12 </span> <a
id="x1-10900012"></a>History and acknowledgments</h3>
-<!--l. 3336--><p class="noindent" >The original authors of <span
+<!--l. 3306--><p class="noindent" >The original authors of <span
class="ec-lmss-10">hyperbasics.tex </span>and <span
class="ec-lmss-10">hypertex.sty</span>, from which this package descends, are
Tanmoy Bhattacharya and Thorsten Ohl. Package <span
@@ -7270,13 +7144,12 @@ Carlisle, T.&#x00A0;V.&#x00A0;Raman and Leslie Lamport for comments, requests, t
get the package into its first useable state. Various other people are mentioned at the point
in the source where I had to change the code in later versions because of problems they
found.
-<!--l. 3349--><p class="indent" > Tanmoy found a great many of the bugs, and (even better) often provided fixes, which has
-made the package more robust. The days spent on Rev<span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span>&#x00A0;are entirely due to him! The
+<!--l. 3319--><p class="indent" > Tanmoy found a great many of the bugs, and (even better) often provided fixes, which has
+made the package more robust. The days spent on RevTeX&#x00A0;are entirely due to him! The
investigations of Bill Moss into the later versions including native PDF support uncovered a
good many bugs, and his testing is appreciated. Hans Hagen provided a lot of insight into
PDF.
-<!--l. 3357--><p class="indent" > Berthold Horn provided help, encouragement and sponsorship for the <span
+<!--l. 3327--><p class="indent" > Berthold Horn provided help, encouragement and sponsorship for the <span
class="ec-lmss-10">dvipsone </span>and <span
class="ec-lmss-10">dviwindo </span>drivers.
Sergey Lesenko provided the changes needed for <span
@@ -7290,14 +7163,14 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">hyper </span>package (developed in parallel with
<span
class="ec-lmss-10">hyperref</span>) showed me solutions for some problems. Hopefully the two packages will combine one
day.
-<!--l. 3366--><p class="indent" > The forms creation section owes a great deal to: T.&#x00A0;V.&#x00A0;Raman, for encouragement, support and
+<!--l. 3336--><p class="indent" > The forms creation section owes a great deal to: T.&#x00A0;V.&#x00A0;Raman, for encouragement, support and
ideas; Thomas Merz, whose book <span
class="ec-lmri-10">Web Publishing with Acrobat/PDF </span>provided crucial insights;
D.&#x00A0;P.&#x00A0;Story, whose detailed article about pdfmarks and forms solved many practical problems; and Hans
Hagen, who explained how to do it in <span
class="ec-lmss-10">pdftex</span>.
-<!--l. 3372--><p class="indent" > Steve Peter recreated the manual source in July 2003 after it had been lost.
-<!--l. 3375--><p class="indent" > Especial extra thanks to David Carlisle for the <span
+<!--l. 3342--><p class="indent" > Steve Peter recreated the manual source in July 2003 after it had been lost.
+<!--l. 3345--><p class="indent" > Especial extra thanks to David Carlisle for the <span
class="ec-lmss-10">backref </span>module, the ps2pdf and dviwindo support,
frequent general rewrites of my bad code, and for working on changes to the <span
class="ec-lmss-10">xr </span>package to suit
@@ -7309,7 +7182,7 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">hyperref</span>.
id="x1-11000013"></a>GNU Free Documentation License</h3>
<!--l. 6--><p class="noindent" >Version 1.2, November 2002
<!--l. 9--><p class="indent" > Copyright <span
-class="lmsy-10">©</span>&#x00A0;2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.<br
+class="ts1-lmr10-">©</span>&#x00A0;2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.<br
class="newline" />59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA<br
class="newline" />Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is
not allowed.
@@ -7371,8 +7244,7 @@ discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image forma
Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not &#8220;Transparent&#8221; is called
&#8220;Opaque&#8221;.
<!--l. 93--><p class="indent" > Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo
-input format, <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span
-class="E">E</span>X</span></span>&#x00A0;input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
+input format, LaTeX&#x00A0;input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification.
Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include
proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML
@@ -7632,7 +7504,7 @@ put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
<!--l. 399--><p class="indent" >
<div class="quote">
<!--l. 400--><p class="noindent" >Copyright <span
-class="lmsy-10">©</span>&#x00A0;YEAR YOUR NAME. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or
+class="ts1-lmr10-">©</span>&#x00A0;YEAR YOUR NAME. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or
modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
Version 1.2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
index ac426cd07d..513e454ffd 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ded7aeb799
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,3383 @@
+% This is the manual for the LaTeX hyperref package.
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1998-2003 Sebastian Rahtz.
+% Copyright (C) 2003 Steve Peter and Karl Berry
+% Copyright (C) 2006-2012 Heiko Oberdiek.
+% Copyright (C) 2017-2019 David Carlisle Ulrike Fischer
+% Copyright (C) 2019-2020 The LaTeX3 Project
+%
+% Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+% under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
+% any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
+% Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
+% Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled
+% ``GNU Free Documentation License.''
+%
+
+\def\mydate{January 2020}
+
+\RequirePackage{iftex}
+\ifpdf % We are running pdfTeX in pdf mode
+\ifx\directlua\undefinded
+\documentclass[pdftex]{article}
+\else
+\documentclass[luatex]{article}
+\fi
+\else
+\documentclass{article}
+\fi
+
+
+\usepackage{pifont}
+\usepackage{calc}
+
+\usepackage{hologo}
+
+\def\OzTeX{O\kern-0.03em z\kern-0.15em \TeX}
+
+\newcommand*{\cs}[1]{%
+ \texttt{\textbackslash #1}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\xpackage}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\xoption}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+% from doc.sty
+\makeatletter
+\ifx\l@nohyphenation\@undefined
+\newlanguage\l@nohyphenation
+\fi
+\ifx\l@nohyphenation\@undefined
+ \newlanguage\l@nohyphenation
+\fi
+\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{%
+ \ensuremath\langle
+ \ifmmode \expandafter \nfss@text \fi
+ {%
+ \meta@font@select
+ \edef\meta@hyphen@restore
+ {\hyphenchar\the\font\the\hyphenchar\font}%
+ \hyphenchar\font\m@ne
+ \language\l@nohyphenation
+ #1\/%
+ \meta@hyphen@restore
+ }%
+ \ensuremath\rangle
+}
+\def\meta@font@select{\ttfamily\itshape}
+\makeatother
+
+% Page layout.
+\advance\textwidth by 1.1in
+\advance\oddsidemargin by -.55in
+\advance\evensidemargin by -.55in
+%
+\advance\textheight by 1in
+\advance\topmargin by -.5in
+\advance\footskip by -.5in
+%
+\pagestyle{headings}
+%
+% Avoid some overfull boxes.
+\emergencystretch=.1\hsize
+\hbadness = 3000
+
+% these are from lshort.sty, but lshort.sty pulls in so many other
+% packages it seems cleaner to just include them here.
+%
+\newcommand{\bs}{\symbol{'134}}%Print backslash
+\newcommand{\ci}[1]{\texttt{\bs#1}}
+
+\makeatletter
+\@ifpackageloaded{tex4ht}{%
+ % separate definition for HTML case to avoid
+ % nasty borders with double horizontal lines with
+ % large gaps.
+ \newsavebox{\cmdsyntaxbox}%
+ \newenvironment{cmdsyntax}{%
+ \par
+ % \small
+ \addvspace{3.2ex plus 0.8ex minus 0.2ex}%
+ \vskip -\parskip
+ \noindent
+ \begin{lrbox}{\cmdsyntaxbox}%
+ \begin{tabular}{l}%
+ \rule{0pt}{1em}%
+ \ignorespaces
+ }{%
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \end{lrbox}%
+ \fbox{\usebox{\cmdsyntaxbox}}%
+ \par
+ \nopagebreak
+ \addvspace{3.2ex plus 0.8ex minus 0.2ex}%
+ \vskip -\parskip
+ }%
+}{%
+ \newenvironment{cmdsyntax}{%
+ \par
+ \small
+ \addvspace{3.2ex plus 0.8ex minus 0.2ex}%
+ \vskip -\parskip
+ \noindent
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|}%
+ \hline
+ \rule{0pt}{1em}%
+ \ignorespaces
+ }{%
+ \\%
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \par
+ \nopagebreak
+ \addvspace{3.2ex plus 0.8ex minus 0.2ex}%
+ \vskip -\parskip
+ }%
+}
+\makeatother
+
+\usepackage{array,longtable}
+\ifnum 0\ifluatex 1\else\ifxetex 1\fi\fi=0 %
+ \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}%
+ \usepackage{lmodern}%
+ \renewcommand*{\ttdefault}{lmvtt}%
+\else
+ \usepackage{fontspec}%
+ \renewcommand*{\ttdefault}{lmvtt}%
+\fi
+
+\newcommand*{\Quote}[1]{\textquotedblleft#1\textquotedblright}
+
+\def\Hanh{H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}} Th\`anh}
+
+\ifpdf
+ \usepackage[%
+% pdftex,% might be luatex, just allow automatic default
+ colorlinks,%
+ hyperindex,%
+ plainpages=false,%
+ bookmarksopen,%
+ bookmarksnumbered,
+ pdfusetitle,%
+ ]{hyperref}
+ %%?? \def\pdfBorderAttrs{/Border [0 0 0] } % No border arround Links
+\else
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\fi
+
+\makeatletter
+\@ifpackageloaded{tex4ht}{%
+\author{Sebastian Rahtz (deceased)\and
+ Heiko Oberdiek (inactive)\and
+ The \LaTeX3 Project (\url{https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues})}
+}{%
+ \usepackage{bmhydoc}%
+\author{Sebastian Rahtz\thanks{deceased}\and
+ Heiko Oberdiek\thanks{inactive}\and
+ The \LaTeX3 Project\thanks{\url{https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues}}}
+}
+\makeatother
+\title{Hypertext marks in \hologo{LaTeX}: a manual for \xpackage{hyperref}}
+\date{2020-05-15 v7.00e}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% comes out too close to the toc, and we know it's page one anyway.
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}% for bookmark levels
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+The package derives from, and builds on, the work of the Hyper\hologo{TeX}
+project, described at \texttt{http://xxx.lanl.gov/hypertex/}\footnote{Now: \url{https://ctan.org/tex-archive/support/hypertex/hypertex}}. It extends
+the functionality of all the \hologo{LaTeX} cross-referencing commands
+(including the table of contents, bibliographies etc) to produce
+\cs{special} commands which a driver can turn into hypertext links;
+it also provides new commands to allow the user to write \emph{ad hoc}
+hypertext links, including those to external documents and URLs.
+
+The package is currently maintained at \url{https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/} and issues should
+be reported there.
+
+This manual provides a brief overview of the \xpackage{hyperref}
+package. For more details, you should read the additional documentation
+distributed with the package, as well as the complete documentation by
+processing \texttt{hyperref.dtx}. You should also read the chapter on
+\xpackage{hyperref} in \textit{The \hologo{LaTeX} Web Companion}, where you will
+find additional examples.
+
+The Hyper\hologo{TeX} specification\footnote{This is borrowed from an article
+by Arthur Smith.} says that conformant viewers/translators must
+recognize the following set of \cs{special} constructs:
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[href:] \verb|html:<a href = "href_string">|
+\item[name:] \verb|html:<a name = "name_string">|
+\item[end:] \verb|html:</a>|
+\item[image:] \verb|html:<img src = "href_string">|
+\item[base\_name:] \verb|html:<base href = "href_string">|
+\end{description}
+
+The \emph{href}, \emph{name} and \emph{end} commands are used to do the
+basic hypertext operations of establishing links between sections of
+documents. The \emph{image} command is intended (as with current HTML
+viewers) to place an image of arbitrary graphical format on the page in
+the current location. The \emph{base\_name} command is be used to
+communicate to the DVI viewer the full (URL) location of the current
+document so that files specified by relative URLs may be retrieved
+correctly.
+
+The \emph{href} and \emph{name} commands must be paired with an
+\emph{end} command later in the \TeX\ file---the \TeX\ commands between
+the two ends of a pair form an \emph{anchor} in the document. In the
+case of an \emph{href} command, the \emph{anchor} is to be highlighted
+in the \emph{DVI viewer}, and when clicked on will cause the scene to
+shift to the destination specified by \emph{href\_string}. The
+\emph{anchor} associated with a name command represents a possible
+location to which other hypertext links may refer, either as local
+references (of the form \verb|href="#name_string"| with the
+\emph{name\_string} identical to the one in the name command) or as part
+of a URL (of the form \emph{URL\#name\_string}). Here
+\emph{href\_string} is a valid URL or local identifier, while
+\emph{name\_string} could be any string at all: the only caveat is that
+`$\verb|"|$' characters should be escaped with a backslash
+($\backslash$), and if it looks like a URL name it may cause problems.
+
+However, the drivers intended to produce \emph{only} PDF use literal
+PostScript or PDF \verb|\special| commands. The commands are defined in
+configuration files for different drivers, selected by package options;
+at present, the following drivers are supported:
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[hypertex] DVI processors conforming to the Hyper\TeX\ guidelines (i.e.\ \textsf{xdvi}, \textsf{dvips} (with
+the \textsf{-z} option), \textsf{\OzTeX}, and \textsf{Textures})
+\item[dvips] produces \verb|\special| commands tailored for \textsf{dvips}
+\item[dvipsone] produces \verb|\special| commands tailored for \textsf{dvipsone}
+\item[ps2pdf] a special case of output suitable for processing by earlier versions of Ghost\-script's
+PDF writer; this is basically the same as that for \textsf{dvips}, but a few variations remained before version 5.21
+\item[tex4ht] produces \verb|\special| commands for use with \textsf{\TeX4ht}
+\item[pdftex] pdf\TeX, \Hanh{}'s \TeX{} variant that writes PDF directly
+\item[luatex] lua\TeX, Unicode \TeX{} variant that writes PDF directly
+\item[dvipdfm] produces \verb|\special| commands for Mark Wicks' DVI to PDF driver \textsf{dvipdfm}
+\item[dvipdfmx] produces \verb|\special| commands for driver
+ \textsf{dvipdfmx}, a successor of \textsf{dvipdfm}
+\item[dviwindo] produces \verb|\special| commands that Y\&Y's Windows previewer interprets as hypertext jumps within the previewer
+\item[vtex] produces \verb|\special| commands that MicroPress' HTML and
+ PDF-producing \TeX\ variants interpret as hypertext jumps within the
+ previewer
+\item[textures] produces \verb|\special| commands that \textsf{Textures} interprets as hypertext jumps within the previewer
+\item[xetex] produces \verb|\special| commands for Xe\TeX{}
+\end{description}
+
+Output from \textsf{dvips} or \textsf{dvipsone} must be processed using
+Acrobat Distiller to obtain a PDF file.\footnote{Make sure you turn off
+the partial font downloading supported by \textsf{dvips} and
+\textsf{dvipsone} in favor of Distiller's own system.} The result is
+generally preferable to that produced by using the \textsf{hypertex}
+driver, and then processing with \textsf{dvips -z}, but the DVI file is
+not portable. The main advantage of using the Hyper\TeX\ \ci{special}
+commands is that you can also use the document in hypertext DVI viewers,
+such as \textsf{xdvi}.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[driverfallback]
+ If a driver is not given and cannot be autodetected, then use
+ the driver option, given as value to this option \textsf{driverfallback}.
+ Example:
+ \begin{quote}
+ \texttt{driverfallback=dvipdfm}
+ \end{quote}
+ Autodetected drivers (\textsf{pdftex}, \textsf{xetex}, \textsf{vtex},
+ \textsf{vtexpdfmark}) are recognized from within \TeX\ and
+ therefore cannot be given as value to option \textsf{driverfallback}.
+ However a DVI driver program is run after the \TeX\ run is finished.
+ Thus it cannot be detected at \TeX\ macro level. Then package
+ \xpackage{hyperref}
+ uses the driver, given by \textsf{driverfallback}. If the driver
+ is already specified or can be autodetected, then option
+ \textsf{driverfallback} is ignored.
+\end{description}
+
+\section{Implicit behavior}
+
+This package can be used with more or less any normal \LaTeX\ document
+by specifying in the document preamble
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Make sure it comes \emph{last} of your loaded packages, to give it a
+fighting chance of not being over-written, since its job is to redefine
+many \LaTeX\ commands. Hopefully you will find that all cross-references
+work correctly as hypertext. For example, \ci{section} commands will
+produce a bookmark and a link, whereas \ci{section*} commands will only
+show links when paired with a corresponding \ci{addcontentsline}
+command.
+
+In addition, the \texttt{hyperindex} option (see below) attempts to make
+items in the index by hyperlinked back to the text, and the option
+\texttt{backref} inserts extra `back' links into the bibliography for
+each entry. Other options control the appearance of links, and give
+extra control over PDF output. For example, \texttt{colorlinks}, as its
+name well implies, colors the links instead of using boxes; this is the
+option used in this document.
+
+
+\section{Package options}
+
+All user-configurable aspects of \xpackage{hyperref} are set using a
+single `key=value' scheme (using the \xpackage{keyval} package) with the
+key \texttt{Hyp}. The options can be set either in the optional argument
+to the \cs{usepackage} command, or using the \cs{hypersetup}
+macro. When the package is loaded, a file \texttt{hyperref.cfg} is read
+if it can be found, and this is a convenient place to set options on a
+site-wide basis.
+
+Note however that some options (for example \texttt{unicode}) can only be used as
+packge options, and not in \verb|\hypersetup| as the option settings are processed
+as the package is read.
+
+As an example, the behavior of a particular file could be controlled by:
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item a site-wide \texttt{hyperref.cfg} setting up the look of links,
+adding backreferencing, and setting a PDF display default:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\hypersetup{backref,
+pdfpagemode=FullScreen,
+colorlinks=true}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\item A global option in the file, which is passed down to
+\textsf{hyperref}:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[dvips]{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\item File-specific options in the \cs{usepackage} commands, which
+override the ones set in \texttt{hyperref.cfg}:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[colorlinks=false]{hyperref}
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={A Perfect Day}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{itemize}
+
+As seen in the previous example, information entries
+(pdftitle, pdfauthor, \dots) should be set after the package is loaded.
+Otherwise \LaTeX\ expands the values of these options prematurely.
+Also \LaTeX\ strips spaces in options. Especially option `pdfborder'
+requires some care. Curly braces protect the value, if given
+as package option. They are not necessary in \verb|\hypersetup|.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[pdfborder={0 0 0}]{hyperref}
+\hypersetup{pdfborder=0 0 0}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Package `kvoptions-patch' patches \LaTeX\ to make it aware
+of key value options and to prevent premature value expansions.
+
+Some options can be given at any time, but many are restricted: before
+\verb|\begin{document}|, only in \verb|\usepackage[...]{hyperref}|,
+before first use, etc.
+
+In the key descriptions that follow, many options do not need a value,
+as they default to the value true if used. These are the ones classed as
+`boolean'. The values true and false can always be specified, however.
+
+\subsection{General options}
+
+Firstly, the options to specify general behavior and page size.
+
+\medskip
+\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}ll}
+draft & boolean & false & all hypertext options are turned off \\
+final & boolean & true & all hypertext options are turned on \\
+debug & boolean & false & extra diagnostic messages are printed in \\
+ & & & the log file \\
+verbose & boolean & false & same as debug \\
+implicit & boolean & true & redefines \LaTeX\ internals \\
+setpagesize & boolean & true & sets page size by special driver commands
+\end{longtable}
+
+\subsection{Options for destination names}
+
+Destinations names (also anchor, target or link names) are internal
+names that identify a position on a page in the document. They
+are used in link targets for inner document links or the bookmarks,
+for example.
+
+Usually anchor are set, if \cs{refstepcounter} is called.
+Thus there is a counter name and value. Both are used to
+construct the destination name. By default the counter value
+follows the counter name separated by a dot. Example for
+the fourth chapter:
+\begin{quote}
+ \verb|chapter.4|
+\end{quote}
+This scheme is used by:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\cs{autoref}] displays the description label for the
+ reference depending on the counter name.
+\item[\cs{hyperpage}] is used by the index to get
+page links. Page anchor setting (\verb|pageanchor|) must not
+be turned off.
+\end{description}
+
+It is very important that the destination names are unique,
+because two destinations must not share the same name.
+The counter value \cs{the<counter>} is not always unique
+for the counter. For example, table and figures can be numbered
+inside the chapter without having the chapter number in their
+number. Therefore \xpackage{hyperref} has introduced \cs{theH<counter>}
+that allows a unique counter value without messing up with
+the appearance of the counter number. For example, the number
+of the second table in the third chapter might be printed
+as \texttt{2}, the result of \cs{thetable}. But the
+destination name \texttt{table.2.4} is unique because it
+has used \cs{theHtable} that gives \verb|2.4| in this case.
+
+Often the user do not need to set \cs{theH<counter>}. Defaults
+for standard cases (chapter, \dots) are provided. And after \xpackage{hyperref}
+is loaded, new counters with parent counters also define
+\cs{theH<counter>} automatically, if \cs{newcounter}, \cs{@addtoreset}
+or \cs{numberwithin} of package \xpackage{amsmath} are used.
+
+Usually problems with duplicate destination names can be solved
+by an appropriate definition of \cs{theH<counter>}. If option
+\texttt{hypertexnames} is disabled, then a unique artificial
+number is used instead of the counter value. In case of page
+anchors the absolute page anchor is used. With option \texttt{plainpages}
+the page anchors use the arabic form. In both latter cases \cs{hyperpage}
+for index links is affected and might not work properly.
+
+If an unnumbered entity gets an anchor (starred forms of
+chapters, sections, \dots) or \cs{phantomsection} is used,
+then the dummy counter name \texttt{section*} and an artificial
+unique number is used.
+
+If the final PDF file is going to be merged with another file, than
+the destination names might clash, because both documents might
+contain \texttt{chapter.1} or \texttt{page.1}. Also \xpackage{hyperref}
+sets anchor with name \texttt{Doc-Start} at the begin of the document.
+This can be resolved by redefining \cs{HyperDestNameFilter}.
+Package \xpackage{hyperref} calls this macro each time, it uses a
+destination name.
+The macro must be expandable and expects the destination name
+as only argument. As example, the macro is redefined to add
+a prefix to all destination names:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{\jobname-#1}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+In document \texttt{docA} the destination name \texttt{chapter.2}
+becomes \texttt{docA-chapter.2}.
+
+Destination names can also be used from the outside in URIs(, if the
+driver has not removed or changed them), for example:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+http://somewhere/path/file.pdf#nameddest=chapter.4
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+However using a number seems unhappy. If another chapter is added
+before, the number changes. But it is very difficult to pass
+a new name for the destination to the anchor setting process that
+is usually deep hidden in the internals. The first name of
+\cs{label} after the anchor setting seems a good approximation:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \section{Introduction}
+ \label{intro}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+Option \texttt{destlabel} checks for each \cs{label}, if there is
+a new destination name active and replaces the destination
+name by the label name. Because the destination name is already in use
+because of the anchor setting, the new name is recorded in the \texttt{.aux}
+file and used in the subsequent \hologo{LaTeX} run. The renaming is done by
+a redefinition of \cs{HyperDestNameFilter}. That leaves the old
+destination names intact (e.g., they are needed for \cs{autoref}).
+This redefinition is also available as \cs{HyperDestLabelReplace},
+thus that an own redefinition can use it.
+The following example also adds a prefix for \emph{all} destination names:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{%
+ \jobname-\HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}%
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The other case that only files prefixed that do not have a corresponding
+\cs{label} is more complicate, because \cs{HyperDestLabelReplace} needs
+the unmodified destination name as argument. This is solved by an
+expandable string test (\cs{pdfstrcmp} of \hologo{pdfTeX}
+or \cs{strcmp} of \hologo{XeTeX}, package \xpackage{pdftexcmds} also supports
+\hologo{LuaTeX}):
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{pdftexcmds}
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{%
+ \ifcase\pdf@strcmp{#1}{\HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}} %
+ \jobname-#1%
+ \else
+ \HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}%
+ \fi
+}
+\makeatother
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+With option \texttt{destlabel} destinations can also named manually,
+if the destination is not yet renamed:
+\begin{quote}
+\verb|\HyperDestRename{|\meta{destination}\verb|}{|\meta{newname}\verb|}|
+\end{quote}
+
+Hint: Anchors can also be named and set by \cs{hypertarget}.
+
+\medskip
+\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}ll}
+destlabel & boolean & false & destinations are named by first \cs{label}\\
+ & & & after anchor creation\\
+hypertexnames & boolean & true & use guessable names for links \\
+naturalnames & boolean & false & use \LaTeX-computed names for links \\
+plainpages & boolean & false & Forces page anchors to be named by the Arabic form \\
+ & & & of the page number, rather than the formatted form. \\
+\end{longtable}
+
+\subsection{Configuration options}
+
+\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{9cm}}
+raiselinks & boolean & true & In the hypertex driver, the height of links is normally calculated by the driver as
+ simply the base line of contained text; this options forces \verb|\special| commands to
+ reflect the real height of the link (which could contain a graphic) \\
+breaklinks & boolean & false & Allows link text to break across lines; since this cannot be accommodated in PDF, it is
+ only set true by default if the pdftex driver is used. This makes links on multiple lines
+ into different PDF links to the same target. \\
+pageanchor & boolean & true & Determines whether every page is given an implicit anchor at the top left corner. If this
+ is turned off, \verb|\printindex| will not contain
+ valid hyperlinks. \\
+nesting & boolean & false & Allows links to be nested; no drivers currently support this.
+\end{longtable}
+
+Note for option \verb|breaklinks|:
+The correct value is automatically set according to the driver features.
+It can be overwritten for drivers that do not support broken links.
+However, at any case, the link area will be wrong and displaced.
+
+\subsection{Backend drivers}
+
+If no driver is specified, the package tries to find a driver in
+the following order:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Autodetection, some \TeX\ processors can be detected at \TeX\ macro
+ level (pdf\TeX, Xe\TeX, V\TeX).
+\item Option \textsf{driverfallback}. If this option is set, its value
+ is taken as driver option.
+\item Macro \cs{Hy@defaultdriver}. The macro takes a driver file
+ name (without file extension).
+\item Package default is \textsf{hypertex}.
+\end{enumerate}
+Many distributions are using a driver file \texttt{hypertex.cfg} that
+define \cs{Hy@defaultdriver} with \texttt{hdvips}. This is recommended
+because driver \textsf{dvips} provides much more features than
+\textsf{hypertex} for PDF generation.
+
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}lp{.8\hsize}@{}}
+driverfallback & Its value is used as driver option\\
+ & if the driver is not given or autodetected.\\
+dvipdfm & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dvipdfm} driver.\\
+dvipdfmx & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dvipdfmx} driver.\\
+dvips & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dvips} driver. \\
+dvipsone & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dvipsone} driver. \\
+dviwindo & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dviwindo} Windows previewer. \\
+hypertex & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the Hyper\TeX-compliant drivers. \\
+latex2html & Redefines a few macros for compatibility with \textsf{latex2html}. \\
+nativepdf & An alias for \textsf{dvips} \\
+pdfmark & An alias for \textsf{dvips} \\
+pdftex & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{pdftex} program.\\
+ps2pdf & Redefines a few macros for compatibility with
+ Ghostscript's PDF writer, otherwise identical to
+ \textsf{dvips}. \\
+tex4ht & For use with \textsf{\TeX4ht} \\
+textures & For use with \textsf{Textures} \\
+vtex & For use with MicroPress' \textsf{VTeX}; the PDF
+ and HTML backends are detected automatically. \\
+vtexpdfmark & For use with \textsf{VTeX}'s PostScript backend. \\
+xetex & For use with Xe\TeX\ (using backend for dvipdfm).
+\end{longtable}
+\smallskip
+
+If you use \textsf{dviwindo}, you may need to redefine the macro
+\ci{wwwbrowser} (the default is \verb|C:\netscape\netscape|) to tell
+\textsf{dviwindo} what program to launch. Thus, users of Internet
+Explorer might add something like this to hyperref.cfg:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand{\wwwbrowser}{C:\string\Program\space
+ Files\string\Plus!\string\Microsoft\space
+ Internet\string\iexplore.exe}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Extension options}
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{8cm}@{}}
+extension & text & & Set the file extension (e.g.\ \textsf{dvi}) which will be appended to file links
+ created if you use the \xpackage{xr} package. \\
+hyperfigures & boolean & & \\
+backref & text & false & Adds `backlink' text to the end of each item in the bibliography, as a list of
+ section numbers. This can only work properly \emph{if} there is a blank line after
+ each \verb|\bibitem|. Supported values are \verb|section|, \verb|slide|, \verb|page|,
+ \verb|none|, or \verb|false|. If no value is given, \verb|section| is taken as default.\\
+pagebackref & boolean & false & Adds `backlink' text to the end of each item in the bibliography, as a list of page
+ numbers. \\
+hyperindex & boolean & true & Makes the page numbers of index entries into hyperlinks. Relays on unique
+ page anchors (\verb|pageanchor|, \ldots)
+ \verb|pageanchors| and \verb|plainpages=false|. \\
+hyperfootnotes & boolean & true & Makes the footnote marks into hyperlinks to the footnote text.
+ Easily broken \ldots\\
+encap & & & Sets encap character for hyperindex \\
+linktoc & text & section & make text (\verb|section|), page number (\verb|page|), both (\verb|all|) or nothing (\verb|none|) be link on TOC, LOF and LOT \\
+linktocpage & boolean & false & make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF and LOT \\
+breaklinks & boolean & false & allow links to break over lines by making links over multiple lines into PDF links to
+ the same target \\
+colorlinks & boolean & false & Colors the text of links and anchors. The colors chosen depend on the the type of
+ link. At present the only types of link distinguished are citations, page references,
+ URLs, local file references, and other links.
+ Unlike colored boxes, the colored
+ text remains when printing.\\
+linkcolor & color & red & Color for normal internal links. \\
+anchorcolor & color & black & Color for anchor text. Ignored by most drivers. \\
+citecolor & color & green & Color for bibliographical citations in text. \\
+filecolor & color & cyan & Color for URLs which open local files. \\
+menucolor & color & red & Color for Acrobat menu items. \\
+runcolor & color & filecolor & Color for run links (launch annotations). \\
+urlcolor & color & magenta & Color for linked URLs. \\
+allcolors & color & & Set all color options (without border and field options).\\
+frenchlinks & boolean & false & Use small caps instead of color for links.\\
+hidelinks & & & Hide links (removing color and border). \\
+\end{longtable} \smallskip
+
+Note that all color names must be defined before use, following the
+normal system of the standard \LaTeX\ \xpackage{color} package.
+
+\subsection{PDF-specific display options}
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{7.6cm}@{}}
+bookmarks & boolean & true & A set of Acrobat bookmarks are written, in a manner similar to the
+ table of contents, requiring two passes of \LaTeX. Some postprocessing
+ of the bookmark file (file extension \texttt{.out}) may be needed to
+ translate \LaTeX\ codes, since bookmarks must be written in PDFEncoding.
+ To aid this process, the \texttt{.out} file is not rewritten by \LaTeX\
+ if it is edited to contain a line \verb|\let\WriteBookmarks\relax| \\
+bookmarksopen & boolean & false & If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, show them with all the subtrees
+ expanded. \\
+bookmarksopenlevel & parameter & & level (\ci{maxdimen}) to which bookmarks are open \\
+bookmarksnumbered & boolean & false & If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, include section numbers. \\
+bookmarkstype & text & toc & to specify which `toc' file to mimic \\
+CJKbookmarks & boolean & false &
+ This option should be used to produce CJK bookmarks.
+ Package \verb|hyperref|
+ supports both normal and preprocessed mode of the \xpackage{CJK} package;
+ during the creation of bookmarks, it simply replaces CJK's macros
+ with special versions which expand to the corresponding character
+ codes. Note that without the `unicode' option of hyperref you get
+ PDF files which actually violate the PDF specification because
+ non-Unicode character codes are used -- some PDF readers localized
+ for CJK languages (most notably Acroread itself) support this.
+ Also note that option `CJKbookmarks' cannot be used together
+ with option `unicode'.
+
+ No mechanism is provided to translate non-Unicode bookmarks to
+ Unicode; for portable PDF documents only Unicode encoding should
+ be used.\\
+pdfhighlight & name & /I & How link buttons behave when selected; /I is for inverse (the default);
+ the other possibilities are /N (no effect), /O (outline), and /P (inset
+ highlighting). \\
+citebordercolor & RGB color & 0 1 0 & The color of the box around citations \\
+filebordercolor & RGB color & 0 .5 .5 & The color of the box around links to files \\
+linkbordercolor & RGB color & 1 0 0 & The color of the box around normal links \\
+menubordercolor & RGB color & 1 0 0 & The color of the box around Acrobat menu links \\
+urlbordercolor & RGB color & 0 1 1 & The color of the box around links to URLs \\
+runbordercolor & RGB color & 0 .7 .7 & Color of border around `run' links \\
+allbordercolors & & & Set all border color options \\
+pdfborder & & 0 0 1 & The style of box around links; defaults to a box with lines of 1pt thickness,
+ but the colorlinks option resets it to produce no border.
+\end{longtable}
+
+Note that the color of link borders can be specified \emph{only} as 3
+numbers in the range 0..1, giving an RGB color. You cannot use colors
+defined in \TeX. Since version 6.76a this is no longer true.
+Especially with the help of package \xpackage{xcolor} the usual
+color specifications of package \xpackage{(x)color} can be used.
+For further information see description of package \xpackage{hycolor}.
+
+The bookmark commands are stored in a file called
+\textit{jobname}\texttt{.out}. The files is not processed by \LaTeX\ so
+any markup is passed through. You can postprocess this file as needed;
+as an aid for this, the \texttt{.out} file is not overwritten on the
+next \TeX\ run if it is edited to contain the line
+\begin{verbatim}
+\let\WriteBookmarks\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{PDF display and information options}
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}l>{\raggedright}p{\widthof{key value}}>{\itshape}lp{7cm}@{}}
+baseurl & URL & & Sets the base URL of the PDF document \\
+pdfpagemode & name & empty & Determines how the file is opening in Acrobat; the possibilities are
+ \verb|UseNone|, \verb|UseThumbs| (show thumbnails), \verb|UseOutlines|
+ (show bookmarks), \verb|FullScreen|, \verb|UseOC| (PDF 1.5),
+ and \verb|UseAttachments| (PDF 1.6). If no mode if explicitly chosen, but the
+ bookmarks option is set, \verb|UseOutlines| is used. \\
+pdftitle & text & & Sets the document information Title field \\
+pdfauthor & text & & Sets the document information Author field \\
+pdfsubject & text & & Sets the document information Subject field \\
+pdfcreator & text & & Sets the document information Creator field \\
+addtopdfproducer & text & & Adds additional text to the document information Producer field \\
+pdfkeywords & text & & Sets the document information Keywords field \\
+pdftrapped & name & empty & Sets the document information Trapped entry. Possible values are \verb|True|, \verb|False| and \verb|Unknown|.
+ An empty value means, the entry is not set.\\
+%
+pdfinfo & key value list & empty & Alternative interface for setting the
+ document information.\\
+pdfview & name & XYZ & Sets the default PDF `view' for each link \\
+pdfstartpage & integer & 1 & Determines on which page the PDF file is opened. An empty value means, the entry is not set.\\
+pdfstartview & name & Fit & Set the startup page view \\
+pdfremotestartview & name & Fit & Set the startup page view of remote PDF files \\
+pdfpagescrop & n n n n & & Sets the default PDF crop box for pages. This should be a set of four numbers \\
+pdfcenterwindow & boolean & false & position the document window in the center of the screen \\
+pdfdirection & name & empty & direction setting. Possible values: \verb|L2R| (left to right) and
+ \verb|R2L| (right to left)\\
+pdfdisplaydoctitle & boolean & false & display document title instead of file name in title bar\\
+pdfduplex & name & empty & paper handling option for print dialog. Possible vatues are:
+ \verb|Simplex| (print single-sided),
+ \verb|DuplexFlipShortEdge| (duplex and flip on the short edge of the sheet),
+ \verb|DuplexFlipLongEdge| (duplex and flip on the long edge of the sheet)\\
+
+pdffitwindow & boolean & false & resize document window to fit document size \\
+pdflang & name & relax & PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)\\
+pdfmenubar & boolean & true & make PDF viewer's menu bar visible \\
+pdfnewwindow & boolean & false & make links that open another PDF file start a new window \\
+pdfnonfullscreenpagemode
+ & name & empty & page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode. Possible values are
+ \verb|UseNone|, \verb|UseOutlines|, \verb|UseThumbs|, and \verb|UseOC|\\
+pdfnumcopies & integer & empty & number of printed copies \\
+pdfpagelayout & name & empty & set layout of PDF pages. Possible values:
+ \verb|SinglePage|, \verb|OneColumn|,
+ \verb|TwoColumnLeft|, \verb|TwoColumnRight|,
+ \verb|TwoPageLeft|, and \verb|TwoPageRight| \\
+pdfpagelabels & boolean & true & set PDF page labels \\
+pdfpagetransition & name & empty & set PDF page transition style. Possible values are
+ \verb|Split|, \verb|Blinds|, \verb|Box|, \verb|Wipe|,
+ \verb|Dissolve|, \verb|Glitter|, \verb|R|,
+ \verb|Fly|, \verb|Push|,
+ \verb|Cover|, \verb|Uncover|,
+ \verb|Fade|.
+ The default according to the PDF~Reference is \verb|R|,
+ which simply replaces the old page with the new one. \\
+pdfpicktraybypdfsize
+ & boolean & false & specify whether PDF page size is used to select input paper tray in print dialog \\
+pdfprintarea & name & empty & set /PrintArea of viewer preferences. Possible values are
+ \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|,
+ \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|.
+ The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\
+pdfprintclip & name & empty & set /PrintClip of viewer preferences. Possible values are
+ \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|,
+ \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|.
+ The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\
+pdfprintpagerange & n n (n n)*
+ & empty & set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences\\
+pdfprintscaling & name & empty & page scaling option for print dialog
+ (option /PrintScaling of viewer
+ preferences, PDF 1.6);
+ valid values are \verb|None| and
+ \verb|AppDefault| \\
+pdftoolbar & boolean & true & make PDF toolbar visible \\
+pdfviewarea & name & empty & set /ViewArea of viewer preferences. Possible values are
+ \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|,
+ \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|.
+ The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\
+pdfviewclip & name & empty & set /ViewClip of viewer preferences Possible values are
+ \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|,
+ \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|.
+ The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\
+pdfwindowui & boolean & true & make PDF user interface elements visible \\
+unicode & boolean & false & Unicode encoded PDF strings
+\end{longtable}
+
+Each link in Acrobat carries its own magnification level, which is set
+using PDF coordinate space, which is not the same as \TeX's. The unit
+is bp and the origin is in the lower left corner. See also
+\verb|\hypercalcbp| that is explained on page \pageref{hypercalcbp}.
+pdf\TeX\
+works by supplying default values for \texttt{XYZ} (horizontal $\times$
+vertical $\times$ zoom) and \texttt{FitBH}. However, drivers using
+\texttt{pdfmark} do not supply defaults, so \textsf{hyperref} passes in
+a value of -32768, which causes Acrobat to set (usually) sensible
+defaults. The following are possible values for the \texttt{pdfview},
+\texttt{pdfstartview} and \texttt{pdfremotestartview} parameters.
+
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}l>{\itshape}lp{7cm}@{}}
+XYZ & left top zoom & Sets a coordinate and a zoom factor. If any one is null, the source link value is used.
+ \textit{null null null} will give the same values as the current page. \\
+Fit & & Fits the page to the window. \\
+FitH & top & Fits the width of the page to the window. \\
+FitV & left & Fits the height of the page to the window. \\
+FitR & left bottom right top & Fits the rectangle specified by the four coordinates to the window. \\
+FitB & & Fits the page bounding box to the window. \\
+FitBH & top & Fits the width of the page bounding box to the window. \\
+FitBV & left & Fits the height of the page bounding box to the window. \\
+\end{longtable}
+
+The \texttt{pdfpagelayout} can be one of the following values.
+
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}lp{10cm}@{}}
+SinglePage & Displays a single page; advancing flips the page \\
+OneColumn & Displays the document in one column; continuous scrolling. \\
+TwoColumnLeft & Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to the left. \\
+TwoColumnRight & Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to the right.\\
+TwoPageLeft & Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the left (since PDF 1.5).\\
+TwoPageRight & Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the right (since PDF 1.5).
+\end{longtable}
+
+Finally, the \texttt{pdfpagetransition} can be one of the following
+values, where \textit{/Di} stands for direction of motion in degrees,
+generally in 90$^{\circ}$\ steps, \textit{/Dm} is a horizontal
+(\texttt{/H}) or vertical (\texttt{/V}) dimension (e.g.\ \texttt{Blinds
+/Dm /V}), and \textit{/M} is for motion, either in (\texttt{/I}) or out
+(\texttt{/O}).
+
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}llp{8.5cm}@{}}
+Blinds & /Dm & Multiple lines distributed evenly across the screen sweep in the same direction to reveal the new
+ page. \\
+Box & /M & A box sweeps in or out. \\
+Dissolve & & The page image dissolves in a piecemeal fashion to reveal the new page. \\
+Glitter & /Di & Similar to Dissolve, except the effect sweeps across the screen. \\
+Split & /Dm /M & Two lines sweep across the screen to reveal the new page. \\
+Wipe & /Di & A single line sweeps across the screen to reveal the new page. \\
+R & & Simply replaces the old page with the new one. \\
+Fly & /Di /M & Changes are flown out or in (as specified by /M), in the direction
+ specified by /Di, to or from a location that is
+ offscreen except when /Di is None. \\
+Push & /Di & The old page slides off the screen while the new page slides in,
+ pushing the old page out in the direction
+ specified by /Di. \\
+Cover & /Di & The new page slides on to the screen in the direction specified
+ by /Di, covering the old page. \\
+Uncover & /Di & The old page slides off the screen in the direction specified by
+ /Di, uncovering the new page in the direction
+ specified by /Di. \\
+Fade & & The new page gradually becomes visible through the old one.
+
+\end{longtable}
+
+\subsection{Option \texttt{pdfinfo}}
+
+The information entries can be set using \texttt{pdftitle},
+\texttt{pdfsubject}, \dots. Option \texttt{pdfinfo} provides an alternative
+interface. It takes a key value list. The key names are the names that
+appear in the PDF information dictionary directly. Known keys such as
+\texttt{Title}, \texttt{Subject}, \texttt{Trapped} and other are mapped to
+options \texttt{pdftitle}, \texttt{subject}, \texttt{trapped}, \dots
+Unknown keys are added to the information dictionary. Their values are text
+strings (see PDF specification).
+Example:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\hypersetup{
+ pdfinfo={
+ Title={My Title},
+ Subject={My Subject},
+ NewKey={Foobar},
+ % ...
+ }
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsection{Big alphabetical list}
+
+The following is a complete listing of available options for
+\textsf{hyperref}, arranged alphabetically.
+
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}llp{7cm}@{}}
+allbordercolors & & Set all border color options\\
+allcolors & & Set all color options (without border and field options)\\
+anchorcolor & \textit{black} & set color of anchors, ignored by most drivers. \\
+backref & \textit{false} & do bibliographical back references \\
+baseurl & \textit{empty} & set base URL for document \\
+bookmarks & \textit{true} & make bookmarks \\
+bookmarksnumbered & \textit{false} & put section numbers in bookmarks \\
+bookmarksopen & \textit{false} & open up bookmark tree \\
+bookmarksopenlevel & \ttfamily\ci{maxdimen} & level to which bookmarks are open \\
+bookmarkstype & \textit{toc} & to specify which `toc' file to mimic \\
+breaklinks & \textit{false} & allow links to break over lines \\
+CJKbookmarks & \textit{false} & to produce CJK bookmarks\\
+citebordercolor & \textit{0 1 0} & color of border around cites \\
+citecolor & \textit{green} & color of citation links \\
+colorlinks & \textit{false} & color links \\
+ & \textit{true} & (\textsf{tex4ht}, \textsf{dviwindo}) \\
+debug & \textit{false} & provide details of anchors defined; same as verbose \\
+destlabel & \textit{false} & destinations are named by the first \verb|\label| after the anchor creation \\
+draft & \textit{false} & do not do any hyperlinking \\
+driverfallback & & default if no driver specified or detected\\
+dvipdfm & & use \textsf{dvipdfm} backend \\
+dvipdfmx & & use \textsf{dvipdfmx} backend \\
+dvips & & use \textsf{dvips} backend \\
+dvipsone & & use \textsf{dvipsone} backend \\
+dviwindo & & use \textsf{dviwindo} backend \\
+encap & & to set encap character for hyperindex \\
+extension & \textit{dvi} & suffix of linked files \\
+filebordercolor & \textit{0 .5 .5} & color of border around file links \\
+filecolor & \textit{cyan} & color of file links \\
+final & \textit{true} & opposite of option draft \\
+frenchlinks & \textit{false} & use small caps instead of color for links \\
+hidelinks & & Hide links (removing color and border) \\
+hyperfigures & \textit{false} & make figures hyper links \\
+hyperfootnotes & \textit{true} & set up hyperlinked footnotes \\
+hyperindex & \textit{true} & set up hyperlinked indices \\
+hypertex & & use \textsf{Hyper\TeX} backend \\
+hypertexnames & \textit{true} & use guessable names for links \\
+implicit & \textit{true} & redefine \LaTeX\ internals \\
+latex2html & & use \textsf{\LaTeX2HTML} backend \\
+linkbordercolor & \textit{1 0 0} & color of border around links \\
+linkcolor & \textit{red} & color of links \\
+linktoc & \textit{section} & make text be link on TOC, LOF and LOT \\
+linktocpage & \textit{false} & make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF and LOT \\
+menubordercolor & \textit{1 0 0} & color of border around menu links \\
+menucolor & \textit{red} & color for menu links \\
+nativepdf & \textit{false} & an alias for \textsf{dvips} \\
+naturalnames & \textit{false} & use \LaTeX-computed names for links \\
+nesting & \textit{false} & allow nesting of links \\
+pageanchor & \textit{true} & put an anchor on every page \\
+pagebackref & \textit{false} & backreference by page number \\
+pdfauthor & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Author field \\
+pdfborder & \textit{0 0 1} & width of PDF link border \\
+ & \textit{0 0 0} & (\texttt{colorlinks)} \\
+pdfborderstyle & & border style for links \\
+pdfcenterwindow & \textit{false} & position the document window in the center of the screen \\
+pdfcreator & \textit{LaTeX with} & text for PDF Creator field \\
+ & \textit{hyperref} & \\
+pdfdirection & \textit{empty} & direction setting \\
+pdfdisplaydoctitle & \textit{false} & display document title instead
+ of file name in title bar\\
+pdfduplex & \textit{empty} & paper handling option for
+ print dialog\\
+pdffitwindow & \textit{false} & resize document window to fit document size \\
+pdfhighlight & \textit{/I} & set highlighting of PDF links \\
+pdfinfo & \textit{empty} & alternative interface for setting document information\\
+pdfkeywords & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Keywords field \\
+pdflang & \textit{relax} & PDF language identifier (RFC 3066) \\
+pdfmark & \textit{false} & an alias for \textsf{dvips} \\
+pdfmenubar & \textit{true} & make PDF viewer's menu bar visible \\
+pdfnewwindow & \textit{false} & make links that open another PDF \\
+ & & file start a new window \\
+pdfnonfullscreenpagemode
+ & \textit{empty} & page mode setting on exiting
+ full-screen mode\\
+pdfnumcopies & \textit{empty} & number of printed copies\\
+pdfpagelabels & \textit{true} & set PDF page labels \\
+pdfpagelayout & \textit{empty} & set layout of PDF pages \\
+pdfpagemode & \textit{empty} & set default mode of PDF display \\
+pdfpagescrop & \textit{empty} & set crop size of PDF document \\
+pdfpagetransition & \textit{empty} & set PDF page transition style \\
+pdfpicktraybypdfsize
+ & \textit{empty} & set option for print dialog \\
+pdfprintarea & \textit{empty} & set /PrintArea of viewer preferences \\
+pdfprintclip & \textit{empty} & set /PrintClip of viewer preferences \\
+pdfprintpagerange & \textit{empty} & set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences \\
+pdfprintscaling & \textit{empty} & page scaling option for print dialog \\
+pdfproducer & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Producer field \\
+pdfremotestartview & \textit{Fit} & starting view of remote PDF documents \\
+pdfstartpage & \textit{1} & page at which PDF document opens \\
+pdfstartview & \textit{Fit} & starting view of PDF document \\
+pdfsubject & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Subject field \\
+pdftex & & use \textsf{pdf\TeX} backend \\
+pdftitle & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Title field \\
+pdftoolbar & \textit{true} & make PDF toolbar visible \\
+pdftrapped & \textit{empty} & Sets the document information Trapped entry.
+ Possible values are \texttt{True}, \texttt{False} and \texttt{Unknown}.
+ An empty value means, the entry is not set.\\
+pdfview & \textit{XYZ} & PDF `view' when on link traversal \\
+pdfviewarea & \textit{empty} & set /ViewArea of viewer preferences \\
+pdfviewclip & \textit{empty} & set /ViewClip of viewer preferences \\
+pdfwindowui & \textit{true} & make PDF user interface elements visible \\
+plainpages & \textit{false} & do page number anchors as plain Arabic \\
+ps2pdf & & use \textsf{ps2pdf} backend \\
+psdextra & \textit{false} & define more short names for PDF string commands \\
+raiselinks & \textit{false} & raise up links (for \textsf{Hyper\TeX} backend) \\
+runbordercolor & \textit{0 .7 .7} & color of border around `run' links \\
+runcolor & \textit{filecolor} & color of `run' links\\
+setpagesize & \textit{true} & set page size by special driver commands \\
+tex4ht & & use \textsf{\TeX4ht} backend \\
+textures & & use \textsf{Textures} backend \\
+unicode & \textit{false} & Unicode encoded pdf strings, by defaut true with \textsf{Xe\TeX} and \textsf{Lu\TeX} \\
+urlbordercolor & \textit{0 1 1} & color of border around URL links \\
+urlcolor & \textit{magenta} & color of URL links \\
+verbose & \textit{false} & be chatty \\
+vtex & & use \textsf{VTeX} backend\\
+xetex & & use \textsf{Xe\TeX} backend\\
+\end{longtable}
+
+\section{Additional user macros}
+
+If you need to make references to URLs, or write explicit links, the
+following low-level user macros are provided:
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{href}\verb|[|\emph{options}\verb|]|\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent The \emph{text} is made a hyperlink to the \emph{URL}; this
+must be a full URL (relative to the base URL, if that is defined). The
+special characters \# and \~{} do \emph{not} need to be escaped in any
+way (unless the command is used in the argument of another command).
+
+The optional argument \emph{options} recognizes the hyperref options
+\texttt{pdfremotestartview}, \texttt{pdfnewwindow} and the following
+key value options:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\texttt{page}:] Specifies the start page number of remote
+PDF documents. First page is \verb|1|.
+\item[\texttt{ismap}:] Boolean key, if set to \verb|true|, the
+URL should appended by the coordinates as query parameters by
+the PDF viewer.
+\item[\texttt{nextactionraw}:] The value of key \verb|/Next| of
+action dictionaries, see PDF specification.
+\end{description}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{url}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent Similar to
+\ci{href}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}{|\ci{nolinkurl}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}}|.
+Depending on the driver \verb|\href| also tries to detect the link type.
+Thus the result can be a url link, file link, \dots
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{nolinkurl}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent Write \emph{URL} in the same way as \verb|\url|,
+ without creating a hyperlink.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hyperbaseurl}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent A base \emph{URL} is established, which is prepended to other
+specified URLs, to make it easier to write portable documents.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hyperimage}\verb|{|\emph{imageURL}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent The link to the image referenced by the URL is inserted, using
+\emph{text} as the anchor.
+
+ For drivers that produce HTML, the image itself is inserted by the
+browser, with the \emph{text} being ignored completely.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hyperdef}\verb|{|\emph{category}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent A target area of the document (the \emph{text}) is marked, and
+given the name \emph{category.name}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hyperref}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}{|\emph{category}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent \emph{text} is made into a link to \emph{URL\#category.name}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hyperref}\verb|[|\emph{label}\verb|]{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent
+\emph{text} is made into a link to the same place as
+\verb|\ref{|\emph{label}\verb|}| would be linked.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hyperlink}\verb|{|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hypertarget}\verb|{|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent A simple internal link is created with \verb|\hypertarget|,
+with two parameters of an anchor \emph{name}, and anchor
+\emph{text}. \verb|\hyperlink| has two arguments, the name of a
+hypertext object defined somewhere by \verb|\hypertarget|, and the
+\emph{text} which be used as the link on the page.
+
+Note that in HTML parlance, the \verb|\hyperlink| command inserts a
+notional \# in front of each link, making it relative to the current
+testdocument; \verb|\href| expects a full URL.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{phantomsection}
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent
+This sets an anchor at this location. It works similar to
+\verb|\hypertarget{}{}| with an automatically chosen anchor name.
+Often it is used in conjunction
+with \verb|\addcontentsline| for sectionlike things (index, bibliography,
+preface). \verb|\addcontentsline| refers to the latest previous location
+where an anchor is set. Example:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cleardoublepage
+\phantomsection
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}
+\printindex
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the
+index points to the start of the index page, not to a location
+before this page.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{autoref}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent
+This is a replacement for the usual \verb|\ref| command that places a
+contextual label in front of the reference. This gives your users a
+bigger target to click for hyperlinks (e.g.\ `section 2' instead of
+merely the number `2').
+
+The label is worked out from the context of the original \verb|\label|
+command by \textsf{hyperref} by using the macros listed below (shown
+with their default values). The macros can be (re)defined in documents
+using \verb|\(re)newcommand|; note that some of these macros are already
+defined in the standard document classes. The mixture of lowercase and
+uppercase initial letters is deliberate and corresponds to the author's
+practice.
+
+For each macro below, \textsf{hyperref} checks \ci{*autorefname} before
+\ci{*name}. For instance, it looks for \ci{figureautorefname} before
+\ci{figurename}.
+
+\begin{longtable}{@{}lp{10cm}@{}}
+\textit{Macro} & \textit{Default} \\
+\ci{figurename} & Figure \\
+\ci{tablename} & Table \\
+\ci{partname} & Part \\
+\ci{appendixname} & Appendix \\
+\ci{equationname} & Equation \\
+\ci{Itemname} & item \\
+\ci{chaptername} & chapter \\
+\ci{sectionname} & section \\
+\ci{subsectionname} & subsection \\
+\ci{subsubsectionname} & subsubsection \\
+\ci{paragraphname} & paragraph \\
+\ci{Hfootnotename} & footnote \\
+\ci{AMSname} & Equation \\
+\ci{theoremname} & Theorem\\
+\ci{page} & page\\
+\end{longtable}
+
+Example for a redefinition if \textsf{babel} is used:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
+\addto\extrasngerman{%
+ \def\subsectionautorefname{Unterkapitel}%
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+Hint: \cs{autoref} works via the counter name that the reference
+is based on. Sometimes \cs{autoref} chooses the wrong name, if
+the counter is used for different things. For example, it happens
+with \cs{newtheorem} if a lemma shares a counter with theorems.
+Then package \xpackage{aliascnt} provides a method to generate a
+simulated second counter that allows the differentiation between
+theorems and lemmas:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\usepackage{aliascnt}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+
+\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}
+
+\newaliascnt{lemma}{theorem}
+\newtheorem{lemma}[lemma]{Lemma}
+\aliascntresetthe{lemma}
+
+\providecommand*{\lemmaautorefname}{Lemma}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+We will use \autoref{a} to prove \autoref{b}.
+
+\begin{lemma}\label{a}
+ Nobody knows.
+\end{lemma}
+
+\begin{theorem}\label{b}
+ Nobody is right.
+\end{theorem}.
+
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{autopageref}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent
+It replaces \verb|\pageref| and adds the name for page in front of
+the page reference. First \ci{pageautorefname} is checked before
+\ci{pagename}.
+
+For instances where you want a reference to use the correct counter, but
+not to create a link, there are starred forms (these starred forms exist even if
+hyperref has been loaded with \verb|implicit=false|):
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{ref*}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{pageref*}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{autoref*}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{autopageref*}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+A typical use would be to write
+\begin{verbatim}
+\hyperref[other]{that nice section (\ref*{other}) we read before}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+We want \verb|\ref*{other}| to generate the correct number, but not to
+form a link, since we do this ourselves with \ci{hyperref}.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{pdfstringdef}\verb|{|\emph{macroname}\verb|}{|\emph{\TeX string}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\ci{pdfstringdef} returns a macro containing the PDF string. (Currently
+this is done globally, but do not rely on it.) All the following tasks,
+definitions and redefinitions are made in a group to keep them local:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Switching to PD1 or PU encoding
+\item Defining the \Quote{octal sequence commands} (\verb|\345|): \verb|\edef\3{\string\3}|
+\item Special glyphs of \TeX: \verb|\{|, \verb|\%|, \verb|\&|, \verb|\space|, \verb|\dots|, etc.
+\item National glyphs (\textsf{german.sty}, \textsf{french.sty}, etc.)
+\item Logos: \verb|\TeX|, \verb|\eTeX|, \verb|\MF|, etc.
+\item Disabling commands that do not provide useful functionality in bookmarks:
+\verb|\label|, \verb|\index|, \verb|\glossary|, \verb|\discretionary|, \verb|\def|, \verb|\let|, etc.
+\item \LaTeX's font commands like \verb|\textbf|, etc.
+\item Support for \verb|\xspace| provided by the \xpackage{xspace} package
+\end{itemize}
+
+In addition, parentheses are protected to avoid the danger of unsafe
+unbalanced parentheses in the PDF string. For further details, see Heiko
+Oberdiek's Euro\TeX\ paper distributed with \textsf{hyperref}.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{begin}\verb|{NoHyper}|\ldots\ci{end}\verb|{NoHyper}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+ Sometimes we just don't want the wretched package interfering
+ with us. Define an environment we can put in manually, or include
+ in a style file, which stops the hypertext functions doing anything.
+ This is used, for instance, in the Elsevier classes, to stop
+ \verb|hyperref| playing havoc in the front matter.
+
+\subsection{Bookmark macros}
+
+\subsubsection{Setting bookmarks}
+
+Usually \textsf{hyperref} automatically adds bookmarks for
+\verb|\section| and similar macros. But they can also set manually.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{pdfbookmark}\verb|[|\emph{level}\verb|]{|text\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+creates a bookmark with the specified text and at the given level (default is
+0). As name for the internal anchor name is used (in conjunction with
+level). Therefore the name must be unique (similar to \verb|\label|).
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{currentpdfbookmark}\verb|{|\emph{text}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+creates a bookmark at the current level.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{subpdfbookmark}\verb|{|\emph{text}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+creates a bookmark one step down in the bookmark hierarchy.
+Internally the current level is increased by one.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{belowpdfbookmark}\verb|{|\emph{text}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+creates a bookmark below the current bookmark level. However after the
+command the current bookmark level has not changed.
+
+\noindent \textbf{Hint:} Package \textsf{bookmark} replaces
+\textsf{hyperref}'s bookmark organization by a new algorithm:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Usually only one \LaTeX\ run is needed.
+\item More control over the bookmark appearance (color, font).
+\item Different bookmark actions are supported (external file links,
+ URLs, \dots).
+\end{itemize}
+Therefore I recommend using this package.
+
+\subsubsection{Replacement macros}
+
+\textsf{hyperref} takes the text for bookmarks from the arguments of
+commands like \ci{section}, which can contain things like math, colors,
+or font changes, none of which will display in bookmarks as is.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{texorpdfstring}\verb|{|\emph{\TeX string}\verb|}{|\emph{PDFstring}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{Pythagoras:
+ \texorpdfstring{$ a^2 + b^2 = c^2 $}{%
+ a\texttwosuperior\ + b\texttwosuperior\ =
+ c\texttwosuperior
+ }%
+}
+\section{\texorpdfstring{\textcolor{red}}{}{Red} Mars}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\ci{pdfstringdef} executes the hook \pdfstringdefPreHook before it
+expands the string. Therefore, you can use this hook to perform
+additional tasks or to disable additional commands.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\expandafter\def\expandafter\pdfstringdefPreHook
+\expandafter{%
+ \pdfstringdefPreHook
+ \renewcommand{\mycommand}[1]{}%
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+However, for disabling commands, an easier way is via
+\ci{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}, which adds its argument to the
+definition of \ci{pdfstringdefPreHook} (`@' can here be used as letter in
+command names):
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{%
+ \let~\textasciitilde
+ \def\url{\pdfstringdefWarn\url}%
+ \let\textcolor\@gobble
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Utility macros}
+
+\label{hypercalcbp}
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hypercalcbp}\verb|{|\emph{dimen specification}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+\noindent
+\verb|\hypercalcbp| takes a \TeX\ dimen specification and
+converts it to bp and returns the number without the unit.
+This is useful for options \verb|pdfview|, \verb|pdfstartview|
+and \verb|pdfremotestartview|.
+Example:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\hypersetup{
+ pdfstartview={FitBH \hypercalcbp{\paperheight-\topmargin-1in
+ -\headheight-\headsep}
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The origin of the PDF coordinate system is the lower left corner.
+
+Note, for calculations you need either package \xpackage{calc} or
+\hologo{eTeX}. Nowadays the latter should automatically be enabled
+for \hologo{LaTeX} formats. Users without \hologo{eTeX}, please, look
+in the source documentation \verb|hyperref.dtx| for further
+limitations.
+
+Also \cs{hypercalcbp} cannot be used in option specifications
+of \cs{documentclass} and \cs{usepackage}, because
+\hologo{LaTeX} expands the option lists of these commands. However
+package \xpackage{hyperref} is not yet loaded and an undefined control
+sequence error would arise.
+
+\section[New Features]{New Features%
+\footnote{This section moved from the README file, needs more integration into the manual}}
+
+
+\subsection{Option `pdflinkmargin'}
+
+ Option `pdflinkmargin' is an experimental option for specifying
+ a link margin, if the driver supports this. Default is 1 pt for
+ supporting drivers.
+
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[pdfTeX]
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item The link area also depends on the surrounding box.
+ \item Settings have local effect.
+ \item When a page is shipped out, pdfTeX uses the current setting
+ of the link margin for all links on the page.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\item[pdfmark]
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Settings have global effect.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\item[xetex]
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Settings must be done in the preamble or the first page and then have global effect.
+ The key inserts the new (x)dvipdfmx special \verb|\special{dvipdfmx:config g #1}| (with the unit removed).
+\end{itemize}
+
+\item[Other drivers]
+ Unsupported.
+\end{description}
+
+
+\subsection{Field option `calculatesortkey'}
+
+ Fields with calculated values are calculated in document order
+ by default. If calculated field values depend on other calculated
+ fields that appear later in the document, then the correct calculation
+ order can be specified with option `calculatesortkey'. Its value is
+ used as key to lexicographically sort the calculated fields.
+ The sort key do not need to be unique. Fields that share the same
+ key are sorted in document order.
+
+
+
+ Currently the field option `calculatesortkey' is only supported by
+ the driver for pdfTeX.
+
+
+\subsection{Option `localanchorname'}
+
+ When an anchor is set (e.g. via \verb|\refstepcounter|, then the
+ anchor name is globally set to the current anchor name.
+
+
+ For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \section{Foobar}
+ \begin{equation}\end{equation}
+ \label{sec:foobar}
+\end{verbatim}
+ With the default global setting (localanchorname=false)
+ a reference to `sec:foobar' jumps to the equation before.
+ With option `localanchorname' the anchor of the equation
+ is forgotten after the environment and the reference
+ `sec:foobar' jumps to the section title.
+
+
+ Option `localanchorname' is an experimental option, there
+ might be situations, where the anchor name is not available
+ as expected.
+
+
+\subsection{Option `customdriver'}
+
+ The value of option `customdriver' is the name of an external
+ driver file without extension `.def'. The file must have
+ \verb|\ProvidesFile| with a version date and number that match the
+ date and number of `hyperref', otherwise a warning is given.
+
+ Because the interface, what needs to be defined in the driver,
+ is not well defined and quite messy, the option is mainly intended
+ to ease developing, testing, debugging the driver part.
+
+
+\subsection{Option `psdextra'}
+
+ LaTeX's NFSS is used to assist the conversion of arbitrary
+ TeX strings to PDF strings (bookmarks, PDF information entries).
+ Many math command names (\verb|\geq|, \verb|\notin|, ...) are not in control
+ of NFSS, therefore they are defined with prefix `text'
+ (\verb|\textgeq|, \verb|\textnotin|, ...). They can be mapped to short names
+ during the processing to PDF strings. The disadvantage is that
+ they are many hundreds macros that need to be redefined for
+ each PDF string conversion. Therefore this can be enabled or
+ disabled as option `psdextra'. On default the option is turned
+ off (set to `false'). Turning the option on means
+ that the short names are available. Then \verb|\geq| can directly
+ be used instead of \verb|\textgeq|.
+
+
+\subsection{\textbackslash XeTeXLinkBox}
+
+ When XeTeX generates a link annotation, it does not look
+ at the boxes (as the other drivers), but only at the character
+ glyphs. If there are no glyphs (images, rules, ...), then
+ it does not generate a link annotation. Macro \verb|\XeTeXLinkBox|
+ puts its argument in a box and adds spaces at the lower left
+ and upper right corners. An additional margin can be specified
+ by setting it to the dimen register \verb|\XeTeXLinkMargin|. The default
+ is 2pt.
+
+ Example:
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ % xelatex
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \setlength{\XeTeXLinkMargin}{1pt}
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{Hello World}
+ \newpage
+ \label{sec:hello}
+ \hyperref[sec:hello]{%
+ \XeTeXLinkBox{\rule{10mm}{10mm}}%
+ }
+ \end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{\textbackslash IfHyperBooleanExists and \textbackslash IfHyperBoolean}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \IfHyperBooleanExists{OPTION}{YES}{NO}
+\end{verbatim}
+ If a hyperref OPTION is a boolean, that means it takes values
+ `true' or `false', then \verb|\IfHyperBooleanExists| calls YES, otherwise NO.
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \IfHyperBoolean{OPTION}{YES}{NO}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Macro \verb|\IfHyperBoolean| calls YES, if OPTION exists as boolean and is
+ enabled. Otherwise NO is executed.
+
+
+
+ Both macros are expandable. Additionally option `stoppedearly' is
+ available. It is enabled if \verb|\MaybeStopEarly| or \verb|\MaybeStopNow|
+ end hyperref prematurely.
+
+
+\subsection{\textbackslash unichar}
+
+ If a Unicode character is not supported by puenc.def, it can
+ be given by using \verb|\unichar|. Its name and syntax is inherited
+ from package `ucs'. However it is defined independently for
+ use in hyperref's \verb|\pdfstringdef| (that converts arbitrary
+ TeX code to PDF strings or tries to do this).
+
+
+
+ Macro \verb|\unichar| takes a TeX number as argument,
+ examples for U+263A (WHITE SMILING FACE):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \unichar{"263A}% hexadecimal notation
+ \unichar{9786}% decimal notation
+\end{verbatim}
+ `"' must not be a babel shorthand character or otherwise
+ active. Otherwise prefix it with \verb|\string|:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \unichar{\string"263A}% converts `"' to `"' with catcode 12 (other)
+\end{verbatim}
+ Users of (n)german packages or babel options may use \verb|\dq| instead:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \unichar{\dq 263A}% \dq is double quote with catcode 12 (other)
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{\textbackslash ifpdfstringunicode}
+
+ Some features of the PDF specification needs PDF strings.
+ Examples are bookmarks or the entries in the information dictionary.
+ The PDF specification allows two encodings `PDFDocEncoding'
+ (8-bit encoding) and `Unicode' (UTF-16). The user can help
+ using \verb|\texorpdfstring| to replace complicate TeX constructs
+ by a representation for the PDF string. However \verb|\texorpdfstring|
+ does not distinguish the two encodings. This gap closes
+ \verb|\ifpdfstringunicode|. It is only allowed in the second argument
+ of \verb|\texorpdfstring| and takes two arguments, the first allows
+ the full range of Unicode. The second is limited to the
+ characters available in PDFDocEncoding.
+
+
+
+ As example we take a macro definition for the Vietnamese
+ name of Han The Thanh. Correctly written it needs some
+ accented characters, one character even with a double accent.
+ Class `tugboat.cls' defines a macro for the typesetted name:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \def\Thanh{%
+ H\`an~%
+ Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}}%
+ ~Th\`anh%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+ It's not entirely correct, the second accent over the `e' is not
+ an acute, but a hook. However standard LaTeX does not provide
+ such an accent.
+
+ Now we can extend the definition to support hyperref.
+ The first and the last word are already supported automatically.
+ Characters with two or more accents are a difficult business in
+ LaTeX, because the NFSS2 macros of the LaTeX kernel do not support
+ more than one accent. Therefore also puenc.def misses support for
+ them. But we can provide it using \verb|\unichar|. The character
+ in question is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ % U+1EC3 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX AND HOOK ABOVE
+\end{verbatim}
+ Thus we can put this together:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \def\Thanh{%
+ H\`an~%
+ \texorpdfstring{Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}}}%
+ {\ifpdfstringunicode{Th\unichar{"1EC3}}{Th\^e}}%
+ ~Th\`anh%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+ For PDFDocEncoding (PD1) the variant above has dropped the
+ second accent. Alternatively we could provide a representation
+ without accents instead of wrong accents:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \def\Thanh{%
+ \texorpdfstring{%
+ H\`an~%
+ Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}}}%
+ ~Th\`anh%
+ }{%
+ \ifpdfstringunicode{%
+ H\`an Th\unichar{"1EC3} Th\`anh%
+ }{%
+ Han The Thanh%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Customizing index style file with \textbackslash nohyperpage}
+
+ Since version 2008/08/14~v6.78f.
+
+
+
+ For hyperlink support in the index, hyperref inserts \verb|\hyperpage|
+ into the index macros. After processing with Makeindex, \verb|\hyperpage|
+ analyzes its argument to detect page ranges and page comma lists.
+ However, only the standard settings are supported directly:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ delim_r "--"
+ delim_n ", "
+\end{verbatim}
+ (See manual page/documentation of Makeindex that explains
+ the keys that can be used in style files for Makeindex.)
+ Customized versions of
+ \verb|delim_r, delim_n, suffix_2p, suffix_3p, suffix_mp|
+ needs markup that \verb|\hyperpage| can detect and knows that
+ this stuff does not belong to a page number. Makro
+ \verb|\nohyperpage| serves as this markup. Put the customized
+ code for these keys inside \verb|\nohyperpage|, e.g.:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ suffix_2p "\\nohyperpage{f.}"
+ suffix_3p "\\nohyperpage{ff.}"
+\end{verbatim}
+ (Depending on the typesetting tradition some space ``\verb|\\|,'' or ``\verb|~|''
+ should be put before the first f inside \verb|\nohyperpage|.)
+
+
+\subsection{Experimental option `ocgcolorlinks'}
+
+ The idea are colored links, when viewed, but printed without colors.
+ This new experimental option `ocgcolorlinks' uses Optional Content
+ Groups, a feature introduced in PDF 1.5.
+
+ A better implementation which hasn't the disadvantage to prevent line breaks is
+ in the ocgx2 package. Check its documentation for details how to use it.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item The option must be given for package loading:
+ \verb|\usepackage[ocgcolorlinks]{hyperref}|
+ \item Main disadvantage: Links cannot be broken across lines.
+ PDF reference 1.7: 4.10.2 ``Making Graphical Content Optional'':
+ Graphics state operations, such as setting the color, ...,
+ are still applied.
+ Therefore the link text is put in a box and set twice, with and
+ without color.
+ \item The feature can be switched of by \verb|\hypersetup{ocgcolorlinks=false}|
+ inside the document.
+ \item Supported drivers: pdftex, dvipdfm
+ \item The PDF version should be at least 1.5. It is automatically
+ set for pdfTeX, LuaTeX and dvipdfmx.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Option `pdfa'}
+
+ The new option `pdfa' tries to avoid violations of PDF/A in code
+ generated by hyperref. However, the result is usually not in PDF/A,
+ because many features aren't controlled by hyperref (XMP metadata,
+ fonts, colors, driver dependend low level stuff, ...).
+
+
+
+ Currently, option `pdfa' sets and disables the following items:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Enabled annotation flags: Print, NoZoom, NoRotate [PDF/A 6.5.3].
+ \item Disabled annotation flags: Hidden, Invisible, NoView [PDF/A 6.5.3].
+ \item Disabled: Launch action (\href{run:...} [PDF/A 6.6.1].
+ \item Restricted: Named actions (\Acrobatmenu: NextPage, PrevPage,
+ FirstPage, LastPage) [PDF/A 6.6.1].
+ \item Many things are disabled in PDF formulars:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item JavaScript actions [PDF/A 6.6.1]
+ \item Trigger events (additional actions) [PDF/A 6.6.2]
+ \item Push button (because of JavaScript)
+ \item Interactive Forms: Flag NeedAppearances is the default `false'
+ (Because of this, hyperref's implementation of Forms looks ugly).
+ [PDF/A 6.9]
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+
+ The default value of the new option `pdfa' is `false'. It influences
+ the loading of the package and cannot be changed after hyperref is
+ loaded (\verb|\usepackage{hyperref}|).
+
+
+
+\subsection{Option `linktoc' added}
+
+ The new option `linktoc' allows more control which part
+ of an entry in the table of contents is made into a link:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item `linktoc=none' (no links)
+ \item `linktoc=section' (default behaviour, same as `linktocpage=false')
+ \item `linktoc=page' (same as `linktocpage=true')
+ \item `linktoc=all' (both the section and page part are links)
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Option `pdfnewwindow' changed}
+
+ Before 6.77b:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item pdfnewwindow=true $\rightarrow$ /NewWindow true
+ \item pdfnewwindow=false $\rightarrow$ (absent)
+ \item unused pdfnewwindow $\rightarrow$ (absent)
+\end{itemize}
+ Since 6.77b:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item pdfnewwindow=true $\rightarrow$ /NewWindow true
+ \item pdfnewwindow=false $\rightarrow$ /NewWindow false
+ \item pdfnewwindow={} $\rightarrow$ (absent)
+ \item unused pdfnewwindow $\rightarrow$ (absent)
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+
+ Rationale: There is a difference between setting to `false'
+ and an absent entry. In the former case the new document
+ replaces the old one, in the latter case the PDF viewer
+ application should respect the user preference.
+
+
+\subsection{Flag options for PDF forms}
+
+ PDF form field macros (\verb|\TextField|, \verb|\CheckBox|, ...) support
+ boolean flag options. The option name is the lowercase
+ version of the names in the PDF specification (1.7):
+
+ \url{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/pdf/pdf_reference.html}
+
+ \url{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/pdfs/pdf_reference.pdf}
+
+ Options (convert to lowercase) except flags in square brackets:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Table 8.16 Annotation flags (page 608):
+
+{\obeylines
+ 1 Invisible
+ 2 Hidden (PDF 1.2)
+ 3 Print (PDF 1.2)
+ 4 NoZoom (PDF 1.3)
+ 5 NoRotate (PDF 1.3)
+ 6 NoView (PDF 1.3)
+ [7 ReadOnly (PDF 1.3)] ignored for widget annotations, see table 8.70
+ 8 Locked (PDF 1.4)
+ 9 ToggleNoView (PDF 1.5)
+ 10 LockedContents (PDF 1.7)
+}
+ \item Table 8.70 Field flags common to all field types (page 676):
+
+{\obeylines
+ 1 ReadOnly
+ 2 Required
+ 3 NoExport
+}
+ \item Table 8.75 Field flags specific to button fields (page 686):
+
+{\obeylines
+ 15 NoToggleToOff (Radio buttons only)
+ 16 Radio (set: radio buttons, clear: check box, pushbutton: clear)
+ 17 Pushbutton
+ 26 RadiosInUniso (PDF 1.5)
+}
+ \item Table 8.77 Field flags specific to text fields (page 691):
+
+{\obeylines
+ 13 Multiline
+ 14 Password
+ 21 FileSelect (PDF 1.4)
+ 23 DoNotSpellCheck (PDF 1.4)
+ 24 DoNotScroll (PDF 1.4)
+ 25 Comb (PDF 1.5)
+ 26 RichText (PDF 1.5)
+}
+ \item Table 8.79 Field flags specific to choice fields (page 693):
+
+{\obeylines
+ 18 Combo (set: combo box, clear: list box)
+ 19 Edit (only useful if Combo is set)
+ 20 (Sort) for authoring tools, not PDF viewers
+ 22 MultiSelect (PDF 1.4)
+ 23 DoNotSpellCheck (PDF 1.4) (only useful if Combo and Edit are set)
+ 27 CommitOnSelChange (PDF 1.5)
+}
+ \item Table 8.86 Flags for submit-form actions (page 704):
+
+{\obeylines
+ [1 Include/Exclude] unsupported, use `noexport' (table 8.70) instead
+ 2 IncludeNoValueFields
+ [3 ExportFormat] handled by option `export'
+ 4 GetMethod
+ 5 SubmitCoordinates
+ [6 XFDF (PDF 1.4)] handled by option `export'
+ 7 IncludeAppendSaves (PDF 1.4)
+ 8 IncludeAnnotations (PDF 1.4)
+ [9 SubmitPDF (PDF 1.4)] handled by option `export'
+ 10 CanonicalFormat (PDF 1.4)
+ 11 ExclNonUserAnnots (PDF 1.4)
+ 12 ExclFKey (PDF 1.4)
+ 14 EmbedForm (PDF 1.5)
+}
+\end{itemize}
+
+ New option `export' sets the export format of a submit action.
+ Valid values are (upper- or lowercase):
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item FDF
+ \item HTML
+ \item XFDF
+ \item PDF (not supported by Acrobat Reader)
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Option `pdfversion'}
+
+ This is an experimental option. It notifies `hyperref' about
+ the intended PDF version. Currently this is used in code for
+ PDF forms (implementation notes 116 and 122 of PDF spec 1.7).
+
+
+
+ Values: 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7. Values below 1.2 are not
+ supported, because most drivers expect higher PDF versions.
+
+
+
+ The option must be used early, not after \verb|\usepackage{hyperref}|.
+
+
+ In theory this option should also set the PDF version,
+ but this is not generally supported.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item pdfTeX below 1.10a: unsupported.
+ pdfTeX $\ge$ 1.10a and < 1.30: \verb|\pdfoptionpdfminorversion|
+ pdfTeX $\ge$ 1.30: \verb|\pdfminorversion|
+ \item dvipdfm: configuration file, example:
+ TeX Live 2007, texmf/dvipdfm/config/config, entry `V 2'.
+ \item dvipdfmx: configuration file, example:
+ TeX Live 2007, texmf/dvipdfm/dvipdfmx.cfg, entry `V 4'.
+ \item Ghostscript: option -dCompatibilityLevel (this is set in
+ `ps2pdf12', `ps2pdf13', `ps2pdf14').
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+ The current PDF version is used as default if this version
+ can be detected (only pdfTeX $\ge$ 1.10a). Otherwise the lowest
+ version 1.2 is assumed. Thus `hyperref' tries to avoid PDF code
+ that breaks this version, but is free to use ignorable higher PDF
+ features.
+
+
+\subsection{Field option `name'}
+
+ Many form objects uses the label argument
+ for several purposes:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Layouted label.
+ \item As name in HTML structures.
+\end{itemize}
+ Code that is suitable for layouting with TeX can
+ break in the structures of the output format.
+ If option `name' is given, then its value is used
+ as name in the different output structures. Thus
+ the value should consist of letters only.
+
+
+\subsection{Option `pdfencoding'}
+
+ The PDF format allows two encodings for bookmarks and entries
+ in the information dictionary: PDFDocEncoding and Unicode
+ as UTF-16BE. Option \xoption{pdfencoding} selects between these encodings:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \xoption{pdfdoc} uses PDFDocEncoding. It uses just one byte per character,
+ but the supported characters are limited (244 in PDF-1.7).
+ \item \xoption{unicode} sets Unicode. It is encoded as UTF-16BE. Two bytes
+ are used for most characters, surrogates need four bytes.
+ \item \xoption{auto} PDFDocEncoding if the string does not contain characters
+ outside the encoding and Unicode otherwise.
+\end{itemize}
+
+ The luatex driver uses \xoption{unicode} by default. If another encoding should be forced,
+ it should be done in \verb|hypersetup|.
+
+\subsection{Color options/package hycolor}
+
+ See documentation of package `hycolor'.
+
+
+\subsection{Option pdfusetitle}
+
+ If option pdfusetitle is set then hyperref tries to
+ derive the values for pdftitle and pdfauthor from
+ \verb|\title| and \verb|\author|. An optional argument for \verb|\title| and
+ \verb|\author| is supported (class amsart).
+
+
+\subsection{Starred form of \textbackslash autoref}
+
+ \verb|\autoref*| generates a reference without link as \verb|\ref*| or \verb|\pageref*|.
+
+
+\subsection{Link border style}
+
+ Links can be underlined instead of the default rectangle or
+ options \xoption{colorlinks}, \xoption{frenchlinks}. This is done by option
+ \verb|pdfborderstyle={/S/U/W 1}|
+
+ Some remarks:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item AR7/Linux seems to have a bug, that don't use the default
+ value \verb"1" for the width, but zero, thus that the underline
+ is not visible without \verb"/W 1". The same applies for
+ dashed boxes, eg.:
+ pdfborderstyle={/S/D/D[3 2]/W 1}
+
+ \item The syntax is described in the PDF specification, look for
+ ``border style'', eg.
+ Table 8.13 ``Entries in a border style dictionary''
+ (specification for version 1.6)
+
+ \item The border style is removed by
+ pdfborderstyle={}
+ This is automatically done if option colorlinks is enabled.
+
+ \item Be aware that not all PDF viewers support this feature, not
+ even Acrobat Reader itself:
+
+ Some support:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item AR7/Linux: \xoption{underline} and \xoption{dashed}, but the border width
+ must be given.
+ \item xpdf 3.00: \xoption{underline} and \xoption{dashed}
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ Unsupported:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item AR5/Linux
+ \item ghostscript 8.50
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Option \xoption{bookmarksdepth}}
+
+ The depth of the bookmarks can be controlled by the new
+ option \xoption{bookmarksdepth}. The option acts globally and
+ distinguishes three cases:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \xoption{bookmarksdepth} without value
+ Then hyperref uses the current value of counter \xoption{tocdepth}.
+ This is the compatible behaviour and the default.
+ \item \verb"bookmarksdepth=<number>", the value is number (also negative):
+ The depth for the bookmarks are set to this number.
+ \item \verb"bookmarksdepth=<name>"
+ The <name> is a document division name (part, chapter, ...).
+ It must not start with a digit or minus to avoid mixing up
+ with the number case. Internally hyperref uses the value
+ of macro \verb|\toclevel@<name>|.
+ Examples:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \hypersetup{bookmarksdepth=paragraph}
+ \hypersetup{bookmarksdepth=4} % same as before
+ \hypersetup{bookmarksdepth} % counter "tocdepth" is used
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Option \xoption{pdfescapeform}}
+
+ There are many places where arbitrary strings end up as
+ PS or PDF strings. The PS/PDF strings in parentheses form
+ require the protection of some characters, e.g. unmatched
+ left or right parentheses need escaping or the escape
+ character itself (backslash).
+ Since 2006/02/12~v6.75a the PS/PDF driver should do
+ this automatically. However I assume a problem with
+ compatibility, especially regarding the form part where
+ larger amounts of JavaScript code can be present.
+ It would be a pain to remove all the escaping, because
+ an additional escaping layer can falsify the code.
+
+ Therefore a new option pdfescapeform was introduced:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item pdfescapeform=false
+ Escaping for the formulars are disabled, this is
+ the compatibility behaviour, therefore this is the default.
+ \item pdfescapeform=true
+ Then the PS/PDF drivers do all the necessary escaping.
+ This is the logical choice and the recommended setting.
+ For example, the user writes JavaScript as JavaScript
+ and do not care about escaping characters for PS/PDF
+ output.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Default driver setting}
+
+ (hyperref $\ge$ 6.72s)
+ If no driver is given, hyperref tries its best to guess the
+ most suitable driver. Thus it loads \xoption{hpdftex}, if pdfTeX is
+ detected running in PDF mode. Or it loads the corresponding
+ VTeX driver for VTeX's working modes.
+ Unhappily many driver programs run after the TeX compiler,
+ so hyperref does not have a chance (dvips, dvipdfm, ...).
+ In this case driver \xoption{hypertex} is loaded that supports the
+ HyperTeX features that are recognized by xdvi for example.
+ This behaviour, however, can easily be changed in the configuration
+ file \verb"hyperref.cfg":
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hdvips}
+\end{verbatim}
+ for dvips, or
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hypertex}
+\end{verbatim}
+ for the default behaviour of hyperref.
+
+ See also the new option `driverfallback'.
+
+\subsection{Backref entries}
+
+ Alternative interface for formatting of backref entries, example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[12pt,UKenglish]{article}
+
+\usepackage{babel}
+\usepackage[pagebackref]{hyperref}
+
+% Some language options are detected by package backref.
+% This affects the following macros:
+% \backrefpagesname
+% \backrefsectionsname
+% \backrefsep
+% \backreftwosep
+% \backreflastsep
+
+\renewcommand*{\backref}[1]{
+ % default interface
+ % #1: backref list
+ %
+ % We want to use the alternative interface,
+ % therefore the definition is empty here.
+}
+\renewcommand*{\backrefalt}[4]{%
+ % alternative interface
+ % #1: number of distinct back references
+ % #2: backref list with distinct entries
+ % #3: number of back references including duplicates
+ % #4: backref list including duplicates
+ \par
+ #3 citation(s) on #1 page(s): #2,\par
+ \ifnum#1=1 %
+ \ifnum#3=1 %
+ 1 citation on page %
+ \else
+ #3 citations on page %
+ \fi
+ \else
+ #3 citations on #1 pages %
+ \fi
+ #2,\par
+ \ifnum#3=1 %
+ 1 citation located at page %
+ \else
+ #3 citations located at pages %
+ \fi
+ #4.\par
+}
+
+% The list of distinct entries can be further refined:
+\renewcommand*{\backrefentrycount}[2]{%
+ % #1: the original backref entry
+ % #2: the count of citations of this entry,
+ % in case of duplicates greater than one
+ #1%
+ \ifnum#2>1 %
+ ~(#2)%
+ \fi
+}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+ \section{Hello}
+ \cite{ref1, ref2, ref3, ref4}
+ \section{World}
+ \cite{ref1, ref3}
+ \newpage
+
+ \section{Next section}
+ \cite{ref1}
+ \newpage
+
+ \section{Last section}
+ \cite{ref1, ref2}
+ \newpage
+
+ \pdfbookmark[1]{Bibliography}{bib}
+ \begin{thebibliography}{99}
+ \bibitem{ref1} Dummy entry one.
+
+ \bibitem{ref2} Dummy entry two.
+
+ \bibitem{ref3} Dummy entry three.
+
+ \bibitem{ref4} Dummy entry four.
+
+ \end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{\textbackslash phantomsection}
+
+Set an anchor at this location. It is often used in conjunction
+with \verb|\addcontentsline| for sectionlike things (index, bibliography,
+preface). \verb|\addcontentsline| refers to the latest previous location
+where an anchor is set.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \phantomsection
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}
+ \printindex
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the
+index points to the start of the index page, not to a location
+before this page.
+
+
+
+\section{Acrobat-specific behavior}
+If you want to access the menu options of Acrobat Reader or Exchange, the following
+macro is provided in the appropriate drivers:
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{Acrobatmenu}\verb|{|\emph{menuoption}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent The \emph{text} is used to create a button which activates the appropriate \emph{menuoption}. The following table lists the option names you can use---comparison of this with the menus in Acrobat Reader or Exchange will show what they do. Obviously some are only appropriate to Exchange.
+
+\medskip
+\begin{longtable}{@{}l>{\raggedright\arraybackslash}p{9cm}@{}}
+File & Open, Close, Scan, Save, SaveAs, Optimizer:SaveAsOpt, Print, PageSetup, Quit \\
+File$\rightarrow$Import & ImportImage, ImportNotes, AcroForm:ImportFDF \\
+File$\rightarrow$Export & ExportNotes, AcroForm:ExportFDF \\
+File$\rightarrow$DocumentInfo & GeneralInfo, OpenInfo, FontsInfo, SecurityInfo, Weblink:Base, AutoIndex:DocInfo \\
+File$\rightarrow$Preferences & GeneralPrefs, NotePrefs, FullScreenPrefs, Weblink:Prefs, AcroSearch:Preferences(Windows)
+ or, AcroSearch:Prefs(Mac), Cpt:Capture \\
+Edit & Undo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear, SelectAll, Ole:CopyFile, TouchUp:TextAttributes,
+ TouchUp:FitTextToSelection, TouchUp:ShowLineMarkers, TouchUp:ShowCaptureSuspects,
+ TouchUp:FindSuspect, \\
+ & Properties \\
+Edit$\rightarrow$Fields & AcroForm:Duplicate, AcroForm:TabOrder \\
+Document & Cpt:CapturePages, AcroForm:Actions, CropPages, RotatePages, InsertPages, ExtractPages,
+ ReplacePages, DeletePages, NewBookmark, SetBookmarkDest, CreateAllThumbs,
+ DeleteAllThumbs \\
+View & ActualSize, FitVisible, FitWidth, FitPage, ZoomTo, FullScreen, FirstPage, PrevPage,
+ NextPage, LastPage, GoToPage, GoBack, GoForward, SinglePage, OneColumn, TwoColumns,
+ ArticleThreads, PageOnly, ShowBookmarks, ShowThumbs \\
+Tools & Hand, ZoomIn, ZoomOut, SelectText, SelectGraphics, Note, Link, Thread, AcroForm:Tool,
+ Acro\_Movie:MoviePlayer, TouchUp:TextTool, Find, FindAgain, FindNextNote,
+ CreateNotesFile \\
+Tools$\rightarrow$Search & AcroSrch:Query, AcroSrch:Indexes, AcroSrch:Results, AcroSrch:Assist, AcroSrch:PrevDoc,
+ AcroSrch:PrevHit, AcroSrch:NextHit, AcroSrch:NextDoc \\
+Window & ShowHideToolBar, ShowHideMenuBar, ShowHideClipboard, Cascade, TileHorizontal,
+ TileVertical, CloseAll \\
+Help & HelpUserGuide, HelpTutorial, HelpExchange, HelpScan, HelpCapture, HelpPDFWriter,
+ HelpDistiller, HelpSearch, HelpCatalog, HelpReader, Weblink:Home \\
+Help(Windows) & About
+\end{longtable}
+
+\section{PDF and HTML forms}
+You must put your fields inside a \texttt{Form} environment (only one per file).
+
+There are six macros to prepare fields:
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{TextField}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{CheckBox}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{ChoiceMenu}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}{|\emph{choices}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{PushButton}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{Submit}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{Reset}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+The way forms and their labels are laid out is determined by:
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{LayoutTextField}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}{|\emph{field}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{LayoutChoiceField}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}{|\emph{field}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{LayoutCheckField}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}{|\emph{field}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+These macros default to \#1 \#2
+
+What is actually shown in as the field is determined by:
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{MakeRadioField}\verb|{|\emph{width}\verb|}{|\emph{height}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{MakeCheckField}\verb|{|\emph{width}\verb|}{|\emph{height}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{MakeTextField}\verb|{|\emph{width}\verb|}{|\emph{height}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{MakeChoiceField}\verb|{|\emph{width}\verb|}{|\emph{height}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{MakeButtonField}\verb|{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+These macros default to \verb|\vbox to #2{\hbox to #1{\hfill}\vfill}|, except the
+last, which defaults to \#1; it is used for buttons, and the special \ci{Submit} and \ci{Reset}
+macros.
+
+You may also want to redefine the following macros:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\def\DefaultHeightofSubmit{12pt}
+\def\DefaultWidthofSubmit{2cm}
+\def\DefaultHeightofReset{12pt}
+\def\DefaultWidthofReset{2cm}
+\def\DefaultHeightofCheckBox{0.8\baselineskip}
+\def\DefaultWidthofCheckBox{0.8\baselineskip}
+\def\DefaultHeightofChoiceMenu{0.8\baselineskip}
+\def\DefaultWidthofChoiceMenu{0.8\baselineskip}
+\def\DefaultHeightofText{\baselineskip}
+\def\DefaultHeightofTextMultiline{4\baselineskip}
+\def\DefaultWidthofText{3cm}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Forms environment parameters}
+
+\smallskip
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}l>{\itshape}lp{9cm}@{}}
+action & URL & The URL that will receive the form data if a \textsf{Submit} button is included in the form \\
+encoding & name & The encoding for the string set to the URL; FDF-encoding is usual, and \texttt{html} is the only
+ valid value \\
+method & name & Used only when generating HTML; values can be \texttt{post} or \texttt{get} \\
+\end{longtable}
+
+\subsection{Forms optional parameters}
+Note that all colors must be expressed as RGB triples, in the range 0..1 (i.e.\ \texttt{color=0 0
+0.5})
+
+\smallskip
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}ll@{}}
+accesskey & key & & (as per HTML) \\
+align & number & 0 & alignment within text field; 0 is left-aligned,\\*
+ & & & 1 is centered, 2 is right-aligned. \\
+altname & name & & alternative name,\\*
+ & & & the name shown in the user interface\\
+backgroundcolor & & & color of box \\
+bordercolor & & & color of border \\
+bordersep & & & box border gap \\
+borderwidth & & 1 & width of box border, the value is a dimension\\
+ & & & or a number with default unit bp\\
+calculate & & & JavaScript code to calculate the value of the field \\
+charsize & dimen & & font size of field text \\
+checkboxsymbol & char & 4 (\ding{\number`4}) & symbol used for check boxes (ZapfDingbats), \\
+&&& the value is a character or \cs{ding}\verb|{|\texttt{\itshape number}\verb|}|, \\
+&&& see package \xpackage{pifont} from bundle \xpackage{psnfss} \\
+checked & boolean & false & whether option selected by default \\
+color & & & color of text in box \\
+combo & boolean & false & choice list is `combo' style \\
+default & & & default value \\
+disabled & boolean & false & field disabled \\
+format & & & JavaScript code to format the field \\
+height & dimen & & height of field box \\
+hidden & boolean & false & field hidden \\
+keystroke & & & JavaScript code to control the keystrokes on entry \\
+mappingname & name & & the mapping name to be used when exporting\\*
+ & & & the field data\\
+maxlen & number & 0 & number of characters allowed in text field \\
+menulength & number & 4 & number of elements shown in list \\
+multiline & boolean & false & whether text box is multiline \\
+name & name & & name of field (defaults to label) \\
+onblur & & & JavaScript code \\
+onchange & & & JavaScript code \\
+onclick & & & JavaScript code \\
+ondblclick & & & JavaScript code \\
+onfocus & & & JavaScript code \\
+onkeydown & & & JavaScript code \\
+onkeypress & & & JavaScript code \\
+onkeyup & & & JavaScript code \\
+onmousedown & & & JavaScript code \\
+onmousemove & & & JavaScript code \\
+onmouseout & & & JavaScript code \\
+onmouseover & & & JavaScript code \\
+onmouseup & & & JavaScript code \\
+onselect & & & JavaScript code \\
+password & boolean & false & text field is `password' style \\
+popdown & boolean & false & choice list is `popdown' style \\
+radio & boolean & false & choice list is `radio' style \\
+radiosymbol & char & H (\ding{\number`H}) & symbol used for radio fields (ZapfDingbats), \\
+&&& the value is a character or \cs{ding}\verb|{|\texttt{\itshape number}\verb|}|, \\
+&&& see package \xpackage{pifont} from bundle \xpackage{psnfss} \\
+readonly & boolean & false & field is readonly \\
+rotation & number & 0 & rotation of the widget annotation \\*
+ & & & (degree, counterclockwise, multiple of 90)\\
+tabkey & & & (as per HTML) \\
+validate & & & JavaScript code to validate the entry \\
+value & & & initial value \\
+width & dimen & & width of field box
+\end{longtable}
+
+\section{Defining a new driver}
+A hyperref driver has to provide definitions for eight macros:
+
+\smallskip
+\noindent 1. \verb|\hyper@anchor|
+
+\noindent 2. \verb|\hyper@link|
+
+\noindent 3. \verb|\hyper@linkfile|
+
+\noindent 4. \verb|\hyper@linkurl|
+
+\noindent 5. \verb|\hyper@anchorstart|
+
+\noindent 6. \verb|\hyper@anchorend|
+
+\noindent 7. \verb|\hyper@linkstart|
+
+\noindent 8. \verb|\hyper@linkend|
+\smallskip
+
+The draft option defines the macros as follows
+\begin{verbatim}
+\let\hyper@@anchor\@gobble
+\gdef\hyper@link##1##2##3{##3}%
+\def\hyper@linkurl##1##2{##1}%
+\def\hyper@linkfile##1##2##3{##1}%
+\let\hyper@anchorstart\@gobble
+\let\hyper@anchorend\@empty
+\let\hyper@linkstart\@gobbletwo
+\let\hyper@linkend\@empty
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Special support for other packages}
+
+Package \xpackage{hyperref} aims to cooperate with other packages, but there are
+several possible sources for conflict, such as
+
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item Packages that manipulate the bibliographic mechanism. Peter
+William's \xpackage{harvard} package is supported. However, the
+recommended package is Patrick Daly's \xpackage{natbib} package that has
+specific \xpackage{hyperref} hooks to allow reliable interaction. This
+package covers a very wide variety of layouts and citation styles, all
+of which work with \xpackage{hyperref}.
+
+\item Packages that typeset the contents of the \ci{label} and \ci{ref}
+macros, such as \xpackage{showkeys}. Since the \xpackage{hyperref} package
+redefines these commands, you must set \texttt{implicit=false} for these
+packages to work.
+
+\item Packages that do anything serious with the index.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The \xpackage{hyperref} package is distributed with variants on two useful
+packages designed to work especially well with it. These are \xpackage{xr}
+and \xpackage{minitoc}, which support crossdocument links using \hologo{LaTeX}'s
+normal \cs{label}/\cs{ref} mechanisms and per-chapter tables of contents,
+respectively.
+
+
+\subsection{Package Compatibility}
+
+Currently only package loading orders are available:
+
+
+
+Note: hyperref loads package \xpackage{nameref} at \verb|\begin{document}|.
+Sometimes this is too late, thus this package must be loaded
+earlier.
+
+
+\subsubsection{algorithm}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{float}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage[chapter]{algorithm}% eg.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{amsmath}
+
+ The environments equation and eqnarray are not supported too well.
+ For example, there might be spacing problems (eqnarray isn't recommended
+ anyway, see CTAN:info/l2tabu/, the situation for equation is unclear,
+ because nobody is interested in investigating). Consider using the
+ environments that package amsmath provide, e.g. gather for equation.
+ The environment equation can even redefined to use gather:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{amsmath}
+ \let\equation\gather
+ \let\endequation\endgather
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{amsrefs}
+
+ Package loading order:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{amsrefs}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{arydshln, longtable}
+
+ Package longtable must be put before hyperref and arydshln,
+ hyperref after arydshln generates an error, thus the
+ resulting package order is then:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{longtable}
+ \usepacakge{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{arydshln}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{babel/magyar.ldf}
+
+ The old version 2005/03/30 v1.4j will not work.
+ You need at least version 1.5, maintained by P\'eter Szab\'o,
+ see CTAN:language/hungarian/babel/.
+
+
+\subsubsection{babel/spanish.ldf}
+
+ Babel's spanish.ldf redefines `\verb|\.|' to support `\verb|\...|'.
+ In bookmarks (\verb|\pdfstringdef|) only `\verb|\.|' is supported.
+ If `\verb|\...|' is needed,
+ \verb|\texorpdfstring{\...}{\dots}|
+ can be used instead.
+
+
+\subsubsection{bibentry}
+
+ Workaround:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \makeatletter
+ \let\saved@bibitem\@bibitem
+ \makeatother
+
+ \usepackage{bibentry}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+
+ \begin{document}
+
+ \begingroup
+ \makeatletter
+ \let\@bibitem\saved@bibitem
+ \nobibliography{database}
+ \endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{bigfoot}
+
+ Hyperref does not support package `bigfoot'. And package
+ `bigfoot' does not support hyperref's footnotes and disables
+ them (hyperfootnotes=false).
+
+
+\subsubsection{chappg}
+
+ Package `chappg' uses \verb|\@addtoreset| that is redefined by `hyperref'.
+ The package order is therefore:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{chappg}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{cite}
+
+ This is from Mike Shell:
+ cite.sty cannot currently be used with hyperref.
+ However, I can do a workaround via:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \makeatletter
+ \def\NAT@parse{\typeout{This is a fake Natbib command to fool Hyperref.}}
+ \makeatother
+
+ \usepackage[hypertex]{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ so that hyperref will not redefine any of the biblabel stuff - so cite.sty
+ will work as normal - although the citations will not be hyperlinked, of
+ course (But this may not be an issue for many people).
+
+
+\subsubsection{count1to}
+
+ Package `count1to' adds several \verb|\@addtoreset| commands that confuse
+ `hyperref'. Therefore \verb|\theH<...>| has to be fixed:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{count1to}
+ \AtBeginDocument{% *after* \usepackage{count1to}
+ \renewcommand*{\theHsection}{\theHchapter.\arabic{section}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\theHsubsection}{\theHsection.\arabic{subsection}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\theHsubsubsection}{\theHsubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\theHparagraph}{\theHsubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\theHsubparagraph}{\theHparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{dblaccnt}
+
+ pd1enc.def or puenc.def should be loaded before:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{dblaccnt}
+\end{verbatim}
+ or see entry for \xoption{vietnam}.
+
+
+\subsubsection{easyeqn}
+ Not compatible, breaks.
+
+
+\subsubsection{ellipsis}
+
+ This packages redefines \verb|\textellipsis|
+ after package hyperref (pd1enc.def/puenc.def should be loaded before):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{ellipsis}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{float}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{float}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Several \verb|\caption| commands are not supported inside one float object.
+ \item Anchor are set at top of the float object, if its style is controlled
+ by float.sty.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsubsection{endnotes}
+ Unsupported.
+
+\subsubsection{foiltex}
+ Update to version 2008/01/28 v2.1.4b:
+ Since version 6.77a hyperref does not hack into \verb|\@begindvi|,
+ it uses package `atbegshi' instead, that hooks into \verb|\shipout|.
+ Thus the patch of `foils.cls' regarding hyperref is now obsolete
+ and causes an undefined error message about \verb|\@hyperfixhead|.
+ This is fixed in FoilTeX 2.1.4b.
+
+
+\subsubsection{footnote}
+
+ This package is not supported, you have to disable hyperref's footnote
+ support by using option \verb"hyperfootnotes=false".
+
+
+\subsubsection{geometry}
+
+ Driver `dvipdfm' and program `dvipdfm' might generate a warning:
+ Sorry. Too late to change page size
+ Then prefer the program `dvipdfmx' or use one of the following
+ workarounds to move the \verb|\special| of geometry to an earlier
+ location:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass[dvipdfm]{article}% or other classes
+ \usepackage{atbegshi}
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \let\OrgAtBeginDvi\AtBeginDvi
+ \let\AtBeginDvi\AtBeginShipoutFirst
+ }
+ \usepackage[
+ paperwidth=170mm,
+ paperheight=240mm
+ ]{geometry}
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \let\AtBeginDvi\OrgAtBeginDvi
+ }
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+
+ or
+
+ \documentclass[dvipdfm]{article}% or other classes
+ \usepackage{atbegshi}
+ \let\AtBeginDvi\AtBeginShipoutFirst
+ \usepackage[
+ paperwidth=170mm,
+ paperheight=240mm
+ ]{geometry}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{IEEEtran.cls}
+
+ version $\ge$ V1.6b (because of \verb|\@makecaption|, see ChangeLog)
+
+
+\subsubsection{index}
+
+ version $\ge$ 1995/09/28 v4.1 (because of \verb|\addcontentsline| redefinition)
+
+
+\subsubsection{lastpage}
+
+ Compatible.
+
+
+\subsubsection{linguex}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{linguex}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{ltabptch}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{longtable}
+ \usepackage{ltabptch}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{mathenv}
+
+ Unsupported.
+
+
+
+ Both `mathenv' and `hyperref' messes around with
+ environment `eqnarray'. You can load `mathenv' after
+ `hyperref' to avoid an error message. But \verb|\label|
+ will not work inside environment `eqnarray' properly,
+ for example.
+
+
+\subsubsection{minitoc-hyper}
+
+ This package is obsolete, use the uptodate original
+ package minitoc instead.
+
+
+\subsubsection{multind}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{multind}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{natbib}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{natbib}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{nomencl}
+Example for introducing links for the page numbers:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewcommand*{\pagedeclaration}[1]{\unskip, \hyperpage{#1}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+For equations the following might work:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewcommand*{\eqdeclaration}[1]{%
+ \hyperlink{equation.#1}{(Equation~#1)}%
+ }
+ But the mapping from the equation number to the anchor name
+ is not available in general.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{parskip}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{parskip}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}[2012/08/20]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+ Both packages want to redefine \verb|\@starttoc|.
+
+
+\subsubsection{prettyref}
+\begin{verbatim}
+%%% example for prettyref %%%
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{prettyref}
+\usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref}
+
+%\newrefformat{FIG}{Figure~\ref{#1}}% without hyperref
+\newrefformat{FIG}{\hyperref[{#1}]{Figure~\ref*{#1}}}
+
+\begin{document}
+ This is a reference to \prettyref{FIG:ONE}.
+ \newpage
+ \begin{figure}
+ \caption{This is my figure}
+ \label{FIG:ONE}
+ \end{figure}
+\end{document}
+%%% example for prettyref %%%
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{ntheorem}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ ntheorem-hyper.sty is an old patched version of ntheorem.sty.
+ Newer versions of ntheorem know the option hyperref:
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage[hyperref]{ntheorem}
+ But there are still unsolved problems (options thref, ...).
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{setspace}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{setspace}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{sidecap}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ Before 2002/05/24 v1.5h:
+ \usepackage{nameref}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{sidecap}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{subfigure}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ 1995/03/06 v2.0:
+ \usepackage{subfigure}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ % hypertexnames is set to false.
+ v2.1:
+ \usepackage{nameref}
+ \usepackage{subfigure}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ or
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{subfigure}
+ v2.1.2:
+ please update
+ v2.1.3:
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{subfigure}
+ or vice versa?
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{titleref}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{nameref}
+ \usepackage{titleref}% without usetoc
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{tabularx}
+
+ Linked footnotes are not supported inside environment `tabularx',
+ because they uses the optional argument of \verb|\footnotetext|, see
+ section `Limitations'. Before version 2011/09/28 6.82i
+ hyperref had disabled footnotes entirely by `hyperfootnotes=false'.
+
+
+\subsubsection{titlesec}
+
+ \xpackage{nameref} supports titlesec, but hyperref does not
+ (unsolved is the anchor setting, missing with unnumbered
+ section, perhaps problems with page breaks with numbered ones).
+
+
+\subsubsection{ucs/utf8x.def}
+
+ The first time a multibyte UTF8 sequence is called, it
+ does some calculations and stores the result in a macro
+ for speeding up the next calls of that UTF8 sequence.
+ However this makes the first call non-expandable and
+ will break if used in information entries or bookmarks.
+ Package \xpackage{ucs} offers \verb|\PrerenderUnicode| or \verb|\PreloadUnicodePage|
+ to solve this:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{ucs}
+ \usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}% or with option unicode
+ \PrerenderUnicode{^^c3^^b6}% or \PrerenderUnicodePage{1}
+ \hypersetup{pdftitle={Umlaut example: ^^c3^^b6}}
+\end{verbatim}
+ The notation with two carets avoids trouble with 8-bit bytes
+ for the README file, you can use the characters directly.
+
+
+\subsubsection{varioref}
+ There are too many problems with varioref. Nobody has time to
+ sort them out. Therefore this package is now unsupported.
+
+
+ Perhaps you are lucky and some of the features of varioref works
+ with the following loading order:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{nameref}
+ \usepackage{varioref}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+ Also some babel versions can be problematic. For exmample,
+ 2005/05/21 v3.8g contains a patch for varioref that breaks
+ the hyperref support for varioref.
+
+
+
+ Also unsupported:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \verb|\Ref|, \verb|\Vref| do not uppercase the first letter.
+\item \verb|\vpageref[]{...}|
+ On the same page a previous space is not suppressed.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsubsection{verse}
+
+ Version 2005/08/22 v2.22 contains support for hyperref.
+
+ For older versions see example from
+ de.comp.text.tex (2005/08/11, slightly modified):
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass{article}
+
+ % package order does not matter
+ \usepackage{verse}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+
+ \makeatletter
+ % make unique poemline anchors
+ \newcounter{verse@env}
+ \setcounter{verse@env}{0}
+ \let\org@verse\verse
+ \def\verse{%
+ \stepcounter{verse@env}%
+ \org@verse
+ }
+ \def\theHpoemline{\arabic{verse@env}.\thepoemline}
+
+ % add anchor for before \addcontentsline in \@vsptitle
+ \let\org@vsptitle\@vsptitle
+ \def\@vsptitle{%
+ \phantomsection
+ \org@vsptitle
+ }
+ \makeatother
+
+ \begin{document}
+
+ \poemtitle{Poem 1}
+ \begin{verse}
+ An one-liner.
+ \end{verse}
+
+ \newpage
+
+ \poemtitle{Poem 2}
+ \begin{verse}
+ Another one-liner.
+ \end{verse}
+
+ \end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{vietnam}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ % pd1enc.def should be loaded before package dblaccnt:
+ \usepackage[PD1,OT1]{fontenc}
+ \usepackage{vietnam}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{XeTeX}
+
+ Default for the encoding of bookmarks is `pdfencoding=auto'.
+ That means the strings are always treated as unicode strings.
+ Only if the string restricts to the printable ASCII set,
+ it is written as ASCII string. The reason is that the
+ \verb|\special| does not support PDFDocEncoding.
+
+ In older versions hyperref contained special conversion code from
+ UTF-16BE back to UTF-8 in a number of places for
+ xetex to avoid the xdvipdfmx warning
+
+ \verb"Failed to convert input string to UTF16..."
+
+ This is no longer needed with a current xdvipdfmx, so this code has
+ been removed. \verb|\csname HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue\endcsname| should no
+ longer be used.
+
+
+\section[Limitations]{Limitations%
+\footnote{This section moved from the README file, needs more integration into the manual}}
+\subsection{Wrapped/broken link support}
+
+ Only few drivers support automatically wrapped/broken links,
+ e.g. pdftex, dvipdfm, hypertex. Other drivers lack this
+ feature, e.g. dvips, dvipsone.
+
+ Workarounds:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item For long section or caption titles in the table of contents
+ or list of figures/tables option \xoption{linktocpage} can be used.
+ Then the page number will be a link, and the overlong section
+ title is not forced into an one line link with overfull \verb|\hbox|
+ warning.
+\item ``\verb|\url|''s are caught by package \xpackage{breakurl}.
+\item The option \xoption{breaklinks} is intended for internal use. But it
+ can be used to force link wrapping, e.g. when printing a
+ document. However, when such a document is converted to PDF
+ and viewed with a PDF viewer, the active link area will be
+ misplaced.
+
+ Another limitation: some penalties are ``optimized'' by TeX,
+ thus there are missing break points, especially within
+ \verb|\url|. (See thread ``hyperref.sty, breaklinks and url.sty 3.2''
+ in comp.text.tex 2005-09).
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Links across pages}
+
+ In general they have problems:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Some driver doesn't support them at all (see above).
+ \item The driver allows it, but the link result might include
+ the footer and/or header, or an error message can
+ occur sometimes.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Footnotes}
+
+ LaTeX allows the separation of the footnote mark and the
+ footnote text (\verb|\footnotemark|, \verb|\footnotetext|). This interface
+ might be enough for visual typesetting. But the relation between
+ \verb|\footnotemark| to \verb|\footnotetext| is not as strong as \verb|\ref| to \verb|\label|.
+ Therefore it is not clear in general which \verb|\footnotemark| references
+ which \verb|\footnotetext|. But that is necessary to implement hyperlinking.
+ Thus the implementation of hyperref does not support the optional
+ argument of \verb|\footnotemark| and \verb|\footnotetext|.
+
+
+\section[Hints]{Hints%
+\footnote{This section moved from the README file, needs more integration into the manual}}
+
+\subsection{Spaces in option values}
+
+ Unhappily LaTeX strips spaces from options if they are given
+ in \verb|\documentclass| or \verb|\usepackage| (or \verb|\RequirePackage|), e.g.:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[pdfborder=0 0 1]{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Package hyperref now gets
+\begin{verbatim}
+ pdfborder=001
+\end{verbatim}
+ and the result is an invalid PDF file.
+ As workaround braces can be used:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[pdfborder={0 0 1}]{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Some options can also be given in \verb|\hypersetup|
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \hypersetup{pdfborder=0 0 1}
+\end{verbatim}
+ In \verb|\hypersetup| the options are directly processed as key value
+ options (see package keyval) without space stripping in the value part.
+
+
+
+ Alternatively, LaTeX's option handling system can be adapted
+ to key value options by one of the packages \xpackage{kvoptions-patch}
+ (from project \xpackage{kvoptions}) or \xpackage{xkvltxp} (from project \xpackage{xsetkeys}).
+
+
+\subsection{Index with makeindex}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Package hyperref adds \verb|\hyperpage| commands by the encap
+ mechanism (see documentation of Makeindex),
+ if option hyperindex is set (default).
+ \verb|\hyperpage| uses the page anchors that are set by
+ hyperref at each page (default). However in the
+ default case page numbers are used in anchor names
+ in arabic form. If the page numbers in other formats
+ are used (book class with \verb|\frontmatter|, \verb|\romannumbering|, ...),
+ then the page anchors are not unique. Therefore option
+ \verb"plainpages=false" is recommended.
+ \item The encap mechanism of Makeindex allows to use one command only
+ (see documentation of Makeindex).
+ If the user sets such a command, hyperref suppresses its
+ \verb|\hyperpage| command. With logical markup this situation
+ can easily be solved:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{makeidx}
+ \makeindex
+ \usepackage[hyperindex]{hyperref}
+ \newcommand*{\main}[1]{\textbf{\hyperpage{#1}}}
+ ...
+ \index{Some example|main}
+\end{verbatim}
+ \item Scientic Word/Scientific WorkPlace users can use
+ package robustindex with hyperindex=false.
+ \item Other encap characters can be set by option \xoption{encap}.
+ Example for use of ``?'':
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[encap=?]{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+ \item Another possibility is the insertion of \verb|\hyperpage| by
+ a style file for makeindex. For this case, hyperref's
+ insertion will be disabled by \verb"hyperindex=false".
+ \verb|\hyperpage| will be defined regardless of setting of hyperindex.
+\begin{verbatim}
+%%% cut %%% hyperindex.ist %%% cut %%%
+delim_0 ", \\hyperpage{"
+delim_1 ", \\hyperpage{"
+delim_2 ", \\hyperpage{"
+delim_n "}, \\hyperpage{"
+delim_t "}"
+encap_prefix "}\\"
+encap_infix "{\\hyperpage{"
+encap_suffix "}"
+%%% cut %%% hyperindex.ist %%% cut %%%
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Warning \texttt{"bookmark level for unknown <foobar> defaults to 0"}}
+
+ Getting rid of it:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\makeatletter
+\providecommand*{\toclevel@<foobar>}{0}
+\makeatother
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Link anchors in figures}
+
+ The caption command increments the counter and here is the
+ place where hyperref set the corresponding anchor. Unhappily
+ the caption is set below the figure, so the figure is not
+ visible if a link jumps to a figure.
+ In this case, try package \xpackage{hypcap} that implements
+ a method to circumvent the problem.
+
+
+\subsection{Additional unicode characters in bookmarks and pdf information entries:}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[pdftex]{article}
+\usepackage[unicode]{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Support for additional unicode characters:
+
+ Example: \verb|\.{a}| and \verb|\d{a}|
+
+ 1. Get a list with unicode data, eg:
+
+ http://www.unicode.org/Public/UNIDATA/UnicodeData.txt
+
+ 2. Identify the characters (\verb|\.{a}|, \verb|\d{a}|):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ 0227;LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DOT ABOVE;...
+ 1EA1;LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DOT BELOW;...
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ 3. Calculate the octal code:
+
+ The first characters of the line in the file are
+ hex values, convert each byte and prepend them
+ with a backslash. (This will go into the PDF file.)
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ 0227 -> \002\047
+ 1EA1 -> \036\241
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ 4. Transform into a form understood by hyperref:
+
+ Hyperref must know where the first byte starts,
+ this is marked by \verb"9" (8 and 9 cannot occur in
+ octal numbers):
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \002\047 -> \9002\047
+ \036\241 -> \9036\241
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ Optional: \verb"8" is used for abbreviations:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \900 = \80, \901 = \81, \902 = \82, ...
+
+ \9002\047 -> \82\047
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ 5. Declare the character with LaTeX:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\.}{PU}{a}{\82\047}
+\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\d}{PU}{a}{\9036\241}
+
+\begin{document}
+\section{\={a}, \d{a}, \'{a}, \.{a}}
+\end{document}
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Footnotes}
+
+ The footnote support is rather limited. It is beyond the scope
+ to use \verb|\footnotemark| and \verb|\footnotetext| out of order or reusing
+ \verb|\footnotemark|. Here you can either disable hyperref's footnote
+ support by \verb"hyperfootnotes=false" or fiddle with internal macros,
+ nasty examples:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\begin{document}
+Hello%
+\footnote{The first footnote}
+World%
+\addtocounter{footnote}{-1}%
+\addtocounter{Hfootnote}{-1}%
+\footnotemark.
+\end{document}
+
+ or
+
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\makeatletter
+
+A%
+ \footnotemark
+ \let\saved@Href@A\Hy@footnote@currentHref
+ % remember link name
+B%
+ \footnotemark
+ \let\saved@Href@B\Hy@footnote@currentHref
+b%
+ \addtocounter{footnote}{-1}%
+ \addtocounter{Hfootnote}{-1}% generate the same anchor
+ \footnotemark
+C%
+ \footnotemark
+ \let\saved@Href@C\Hy@footnote@currentHref
+
+ \addtocounter{footnote}{-2}%
+ \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@A
+\footnotetext{AAAA}%
+ \addtocounter{footnote}{1}%
+ \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@B
+\footnotetext{BBBBB}%
+ \addtocounter{footnote}{1}%
+ \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@C
+\footnotetext{CCCC}%
+
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Subordinate counters}
+
+ Some counters do not have unique values and require the value
+ of other counters to be unique. For example, sections or figures
+ might be numbered within chapters or \verb|\newtheorem| is used with
+ an optional counter argument. Internally LaTeX uses \verb|\@addtoreset|
+ to reset a counter in dependency to another counter. Package
+ hyperref hooks into \verb|\@addtoreset| to catch this situation.
+ Also \verb|\numberwithin| of package amsmath is caught by hyperref.
+
+
+
+ However, if the definition of subordinate counters take place
+ before hyperref is loaded, the old meaning of \verb|\@addtoreset| is
+ called without hyperref's additions. Then the companion counter
+ macro \verb|\theH<counter>| can be redefined accordingly. Or move the
+ definition of subordinate counters after hyperref is loaded.
+
+ Example for \verb|\newtheorem|, problematic case:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section]
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Solution a)
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Solution b)
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section]
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \newcommand*{\theHcorA}{\theHsection.\number\value{corA}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{History and acknowledgments}
+
+The original authors of \textsf{hyperbasics.tex} and
+\textsf{hypertex.sty}, from which this package descends, are Tanmoy
+Bhattacharya and Thorsten Ohl. Package \xpackage{hyperref}
+started as a simple port of their work to \hologo{LaTeXe} standards, but
+eventually I rewrote nearly everything, because I didn't understand a
+lot of the original, and was only interested in getting it to work with
+\hologo{LaTeX}. I would like to thank Arthur Smith, Tanmoy Bhattacharya, Mark
+Doyle, Paul Ginsparg, David Carlisle, T.\ V.\ Raman and Leslie Lamport
+for comments, requests, thoughts and code to get the package into its
+first useable state. Various other people are mentioned at the point in
+the source where I had to change the code in later versions because of
+problems they found.
+
+Tanmoy found a great many of the bugs, and (even better) often provided
+fixes, which has made the package more robust. The days spent on
+Rev\TeX\ are entirely due to him! The investigations of Bill Moss
+into the later versions including
+native PDF support uncovered a good many bugs, and his testing is
+appreciated. Hans Hagen provided a lot of
+insight into PDF.
+
+Berthold Horn provided help, encouragement and sponsorship for the
+\textsf{dvipsone} and \textsf{dviwindo} drivers. Sergey Lesenko provided
+the changes needed for \textsf{dvipdf}, and \Hanh{} supplied all the
+information needed for \textsf{pdftex}. Patrick Daly kindly updated his
+\xpackage{natbib} package to allow easy integration with
+\xpackage{hyperref}. Michael Mehlich's \xpackage{hyper} package (developed
+in parallel with \textsf{hyperref}) showed me solutions for some
+problems. Hopefully the two packages will combine one day.
+
+The forms creation section owes a great deal to: T.\ V.\ Raman, for
+encouragement, support and ideas; Thomas Merz, whose book \emph{Web
+Publishing with Acrobat/PDF} provided crucial insights; D.\ P.\ Story,
+whose detailed article about pdfmarks and forms solved many practical
+problems; and Hans Hagen, who explained how to do it in \textsf{pdftex}.
+
+Steve Peter recreated the manual source in July 2003 after it had been
+lost.
+
+Especial extra thanks to David Carlisle for the \xpackage{backref} module,
+the ps2pdf and dviwindo support, frequent general rewrites of my bad
+code, and for working on changes to the \xpackage{xr} package to suit
+\xpackage{hyperref}.
+
+\begingroup
+ \makeatletter
+ \let\chapter=\section
+ % subsections goes into bookmarks but not toc
+ \hypersetup{bookmarksopenlevel=1}
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}}
+ % The \section command acts as \subsection.
+ % Additionally the title is converted to lowercase except
+ % for the first letter.
+ \def\section{%
+ \let\section\lc@subsection
+ \lc@subsection
+ }
+ \def\lc@subsection{%
+ \@ifstar{\def\mystar{*}\lc@sec}%
+ {\let\mystar\@empty\lc@sec}%
+ }
+ \def\lc@sec#1{%
+ \lc@@sec#1\@nil
+ }
+ \def\lc@@sec#1#2\@nil{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\a{#1}%
+ \lowercase{%
+ \edef\x{\endgroup
+ \noexpand\subsection\mystar{\a#2}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \x
+ }
+ \include{fdl}
+\endgroup
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual2.html b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual2.html
index cfc5150328..71af561e04 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual2.html
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual2.html
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
<html >
<head><title></title>
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
-<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
-<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
<!-- html -->
<meta name="src" content="manual.tex">
<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="manual.css">
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual3.html b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual3.html
index 3dcd508fdb..00062b22f0 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual3.html
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual3.html
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
<html >
<head><title></title>
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
-<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
-<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
<!-- html -->
<meta name="src" content="manual.tex">
<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="manual.css">
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual4.html b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual4.html
index 6322ca81b9..70dae2e346 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual4.html
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual4.html
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
<html >
<head><title></title>
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
-<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
-<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
<!-- html -->
<meta name="src" content="manual.tex">
<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="manual.css">
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual5.html b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual5.html
index 9dac190d9b..01434811f6 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual5.html
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual5.html
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
<html >
<head><title></title>
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
-<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
-<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
<!-- html -->
<meta name="src" content="manual.tex">
<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="manual.css">
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual6.html b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual6.html
index b0bc75179c..eba4717509 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual6.html
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual6.html
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
<html >
<head><title></title>
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
-<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
-<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
<!-- html -->
<meta name="src" content="manual.tex">
<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="manual.css">
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual7.html b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual7.html
index c891e7a0b5..17b42e0aef 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual7.html
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual7.html
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
<html >
<head><title></title>
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
-<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
-<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
+<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (https://tug.org/tex4ht/)">
<!-- html -->
<meta name="src" content="manual.tex">
<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="manual.css">
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/nameref.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/nameref.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..226cdce2dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/nameref.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/fdl.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/fdl.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..57f9b31621
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/fdl.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,422 @@
+% This file is a chapter. It must be included in a larger document to work
+% properly.
+
+\chapter{GNU Free Documentation License}
+
+Version 1.2, November 2002
+
+
+ Copyright \copyright\ 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.\\
+ 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA\\
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+
+\section*{PREAMBLE}
+
+The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
+functional and useful document ``free'' in the sense of freedom: to
+assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
+with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
+Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
+to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
+for modifications made by others.
+
+This License is a kind of ``copyleft'', which means that derivative
+works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It
+complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
+license designed for free software.
+
+We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
+software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
+program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
+software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals;
+it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
+whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License
+principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
+
+
+\section{APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS}
+\label{applicability}
+
+This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
+distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a
+world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
+work under the conditions stated herein. The ``Document'', below,
+refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a
+licensee, and is addressed as ``you''. You accept the license if you
+copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
+under copyright law.
+
+A ``Modified Version'' of the Document means any work containing the
+Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
+modifications and/or translated into another language.
+
+A ``Secondary Section'' is a named appendix or a front-matter section of
+the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
+publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject
+(or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly
+within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a
+textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any
+mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical
+connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
+commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
+them.
+
+The ``Invariant Sections'' are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
+are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
+that says that the Document is released under this License. If a
+section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
+allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero
+Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant
+Sections then there are none.
+
+The ``Cover Texts'' are certain short passages of text that are listed,
+as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
+the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may
+be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
+
+A ``Transparent'' copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+represented in a format whose specification is available to the
+general public, that is suitable for revising the document
+straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
+pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
+drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
+for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
+to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
+format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
+or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
+An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
+of text. A copy that is not ``Transparent'' is called ``Opaque''.
+
+Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
+ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, \LaTeX\ input format, SGML
+or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple
+HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of
+transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats
+include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by
+proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or
+processing tools are not generally available, and the
+machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
+processors for output purposes only.
+
+The ``Title Page'' means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
+this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in
+formats which do not have any title page as such, ``Title Page'' means
+the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
+preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+
+A section ``Entitled XYZ'' means a named subunit of the Document whose
+title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
+text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a
+specific section name mentioned below, such as ``Acknowledgements'',
+``Dedications'', ``Endorsements'', or ``History''.) To ``Preserve the Title''
+of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
+section ``Entitled XYZ'' according to this definition.
+
+The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
+states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty
+Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
+License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
+implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
+no effect on the meaning of this License.
+
+
+\section{VERBATIM COPYING}
+\label{verbatim}
+
+You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
+commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
+copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
+to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
+conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use
+technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
+copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept
+compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough
+number of copies you must also follow the conditions in
+section~\ref{copying}.
+
+You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
+you may publicly display copies.
+
+
+\section{COPYING IN QUANTITY}
+\label{copying}
+
+If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
+printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
+Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
+copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
+Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
+the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
+you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present
+the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
+visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition.
+Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
+the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
+as verbatim copying in other respects.
+
+If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
+legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
+reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
+pages.
+
+If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
+more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
+copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
+a computer-network location from which the general network-using
+public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
+a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
+If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
+when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
+that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
+location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
+Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
+edition to the public.
+
+It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
+Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give
+them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
+
+
+\section{MODIFICATIONS}
+\label{modifications}
+
+You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
+the conditions of sections~\ref{verbatim} and \ref{copying} above,
+provided that you release
+the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
+Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
+and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
+of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
+
+\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}.}
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
+ from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
+ (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
+ of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version
+ if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
+\item List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
+ responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
+ Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
+ Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
+ unless they release you from this requirement.
+\item State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
+ Modified Version, as the publisher.
+\item Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
+\item Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
+ adjacent to the other copyright notices.
+\item Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
+ giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
+ terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
+\item Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
+ and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
+\item Include an unaltered copy of this License.
+\item Preserve the section Entitled ``History'', Preserve its Title, and add
+ to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
+ publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If
+ there is no section Entitled ``History'' in the Document, create one
+ stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
+ given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
+ Version as stated in the previous sentence.
+\item Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
+ public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
+ the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
+ it was based on. These may be placed in the ``History'' section.
+ You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
+ least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
+ publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
+\item For any section Entitled ``Acknowledgements'' or ``Dedications'',
+ Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all
+ the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
+ and/or dedications given therein.
+\item Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
+ unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
+ or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
+\item Delete any section Entitled ``Endorsements''. Such a section
+ may not be included in the Modified Version.
+\item Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled ``Endorsements''
+ or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
+\item Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
+appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
+copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
+of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the
+list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
+These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
+
+You may add a section Entitled ``Endorsements'', provided it contains
+nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
+parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
+been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
+standard.
+
+You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
+passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
+of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of
+Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
+through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already
+includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
+by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
+you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
+permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
+
+The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
+give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
+imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
+
+
+\section{COMBINING DOCUMENTS}
+\label{combining}
+
+You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
+License, under the terms defined in section~\ref{modifications}
+above for modified
+versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
+Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
+list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
+license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
+multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
+copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
+different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
+adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
+author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
+Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
+Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
+
+In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled ``History''
+in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
+``History''; likewise combine any sections Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
+and any sections Entitled ``Dedications''. You must delete all sections
+Entitled ``Endorsements''.
+
+
+\section{COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS}
+\label{collections}
+
+You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents
+released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this
+License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in
+the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for
+verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
+
+You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
+it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
+License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
+other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
+
+
+\section{AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS}
+\label{aggregation}
+
+A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
+and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
+distribution medium, is called an ``aggregate'' if the copyright
+resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
+of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
+When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not
+apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
+derivative works of the Document.
+
+If the Cover Text requirement of section~\ref{copying} is applicable to
+these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
+of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
+covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
+electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
+Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
+aggregate.
+
+
+\section{TRANSLATION}
+\label{translation}
+
+Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
+distribute translations of the Document under the terms of
+section~\ref{modifications}.
+Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
+permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
+translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
+original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
+translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
+Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
+the original English version of this License and the original versions
+of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between
+the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
+or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
+
+If a section in the Document is Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
+``Dedications'', or ``History'', the requirement
+(section~\ref{modifications}) to Preserve
+its Title (section~\ref{applicability}) will typically require
+changing the actual title.
+
+
+\section{TERMINATION}
+\label{termination}
+
+You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except
+as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to
+copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will
+automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
+parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
+License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+
+\section{FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE}
+\label{future}
+
+The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
+of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
+versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
+http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
+
+Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
+If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
+License ``or any later version'' applies to it, you have the option of
+following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
+of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
+Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version
+number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
+as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+
+\section*{ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents}
+
+To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
+the License in the document and put the following copyright and
+license notices just after the title page:
+
+\begin{quote}
+ Copyright \copyright\ YEAR YOUR NAME.
+ Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+ under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
+ or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+ with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
+ A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
+ Free Documentation License''.
+\end{quote}
+
+If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
+replace the ``with...Texts.'' line with this:
+
+ with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
+ Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
+
+If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
+combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
+situation.
+
+If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
+recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
+free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
+to permit their use in free software.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hluatex.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hluatex.dtx
index 52f1c0ebae..17d19b77ad 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hluatex.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hluatex.dtx
@@ -1,13 +1,16 @@
% \iffalse
-%% Source File: hluatex.dtx
-%% Copyright 2016 Oberdiek Package Support Group
-%% Copyright 2019 The LaTeX3 Project
-%%
-%%
-%% Derived from hpdftex.def
-%%
-%% This file may be distributed under the terms of the LPPL.
-%% See README for details.
+% Source File: hluatex.dtx
+% 2020-05-15 v7.00e
+%
+% Copyright
+% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group
+% 2019-2020 The LaTeX3 Project
+% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues%%
+%
+% Derived from hpdftex.def
+%
+% This file may be distributed under the terms of the LPPL.
+% See README for details.
%
%<*driver>
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
@@ -28,7 +31,8 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*luatex>
-%% 2019-09-17,v 6.88j force unicode encoding, see issue #101
+%% 2020-05-15 v7.00e
+%% force unicode encoding, see issue #101
%% code mostly copied from hxetex.def
\HyPsd@LoadUnicode
\Hy@unicodetrue
@@ -1364,7 +1368,6 @@
\Hy@unicodefalse
\fi
\fi
- \HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue
\pdfstringdef\Hy@gtemp#1%
\endgroup
\let#1\Hy@gtemp
@@ -1720,7 +1723,6 @@
\let\partnumberline\@gobble
\let\chapternumberline\@gobble
\fi
- \HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue
\pdfstringdef\Hy@tempa{#2}%
\HyPsd@SanitizeForOutFile\Hy@tempa
\if@filesw
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.dtx
index 67860c979c..aa618b1bd2 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.dtx
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
%<puvnenc>\ProvidesFile{puvnenc.def}
%<puarenc>\ProvidesFile{puarenc.def}
%<psdextra>\ProvidesFile{psdextra.def}
-%<!none> [2020/01/14 v7.00d %
+%<!none> [2020-05-15 v7.00e %
%<package> Hypertext links for LaTeX]
%<nohyperref> Dummy hyperref (SR)]
%<driver> Hyperref documentation driver file]
@@ -1911,7 +1911,6 @@
\HyPsd@EscapeTeX#1%
\Hy@unicodefalse
}{%
- \HyPsd@ToBigChars#1%
\HyPsd@EscapeTeX#1%
}%
\else
@@ -1926,7 +1925,6 @@
}%
\fi
\fi
- \HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharsfalse
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \paragraph{User hook.}
@@ -1951,82 +1949,8 @@
% \subsection{Encodings}
%
% \subsubsection{Xe\TeX}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\Hy@temp{\catcode0=\the\catcode0\relax}
-\catcode\z@=12 %
-\ifxetex
- \expandafter\@firstofone
-\else
- \let\HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue\@empty
- \let\HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharsfalse\@empty
- \expandafter\@gobble
-\fi
-{%
- \newif\ifHyPsd@XeTeXBigChars
- \def\HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharsfalse{%
- \global\let\ifHyPsd@XeTeXBigChars\iffalse
- }%
- \def\HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue{%
- \global\let\ifHyPsd@XeTeXBigChars\iftrue
- }%
- \def\HyPsd@ToBigChars#1{%
- \ifHyPsd@XeTeXBigChars
- \EdefEscapeHex\HyPsd@UnescapedString{%
- \expandafter\@gobbletwo\HyPsd@UnescapedString
- }%
- \begingroup
- \toks@{}%
- \escapechar=92\relax
- \let\x\HyPsd@ToBigChar
- \expandafter\HyPsd@ToBigChar\HyPsd@UnescapedString
- \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax
- \edef\x{%
- \endgroup
- \gdef\noexpand#1{\the\toks@}%
- }%
- \x
- \fi
- }%
- \def\HyPsd@ToBigChar#1#2#3#4{%
- \ifx\relax#1\relax
- \let\x\relax
- \else
- \count@="#1#2#3#4\relax
- \let\y\@empty
- \lccode\z@=\count@
- \ifnum\count@=40 % (
- \let\y\@backslashchar
- \else
- \ifnum\count@=41 % )
- \let\y\@backslashchar
- \else
- \ifnum\count@=92 % backslash
- \let\y\@backslashchar
- \else
- \ifnum\count@=10 % newline
- \edef\y##1{\string\n}%
- \else
- \ifnum\count@=13 % carriage return
- \edef\y##1{\string\r}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \lowercase{%
- \toks@\expandafter{%
- \the\expandafter\toks@
- \y
- ^^@%
- }%
- }%
- \fi
- \x
- }%
-}
-\Hy@temp
-% \end{macrocode}
+% change 2020-05-13: the special code for XeTeX big chars has been removed as no
+% longer needed.
%
% \subsubsection{Workaround for package linguex}
%
@@ -5289,7 +5213,7 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \verb|\Hy@pdfminorversion| already used elsewhere to denote \verb|\pdfminorversion|
+% \verb|\Hy@pdfminorversion| already used elsewhere to denote \verb|\pdfminorversion|
% or \verb|\pdfvariable majorversion}| so introduce new names here.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{Hy@pdfversion@1.2}{\def\Hy@pdf@majorversion{1}\def\Hy@pdf@minorversion{2}}%
@@ -5312,7 +5236,7 @@
\@ifundefined{pdfminorversion}{}{%
\@ifundefined{pdfmajorversion}{%
\newcount\pdfmajorversion
-\pdfmajorversion=1
+\pdfmajorversion=1
}{}%
}
\ifx\pdfmajorversion\@undefined\else
@@ -6598,31 +6522,26 @@
}
\define@key{Hyp}{pdftitle}{%
\HyXeTeX@CheckUnicode
- \HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue
\HyPsd@PrerenderUnicode{#1}%
\pdfstringdef\@pdftitle{#1}%
}
\define@key{Hyp}{pdfauthor}{%
\HyXeTeX@CheckUnicode
- \HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue
\HyPsd@PrerenderUnicode{#1}%
\pdfstringdef\@pdfauthor{#1}%
}
\define@key{Hyp}{pdfproducer}{%
\HyXeTeX@CheckUnicode
- \HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue
\HyPsd@PrerenderUnicode{#1}%
\pdfstringdef\@pdfproducer{#1}%
}
\define@key{Hyp}{pdfcreator}{%
\HyXeTeX@CheckUnicode
- \HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue
\HyPsd@PrerenderUnicode{#1}%
\pdfstringdef\@pdfcreator{#1}%
}
\define@key{Hyp}{addtopdfcreator}{%
\HyXeTeX@CheckUnicode
- \HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue
\HyPsd@PrerenderUnicode{#1}%
\pdfstringdef\@pdfcreator{\@pdfcreator, #1}%
}
@@ -6640,13 +6559,11 @@
}
\define@key{Hyp}{pdfsubject}{%
\HyXeTeX@CheckUnicode
- \HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue
\HyPsd@PrerenderUnicode{#1}%
\pdfstringdef\@pdfsubject{#1}%
}
\define@key{Hyp}{pdfkeywords}{%
\HyXeTeX@CheckUnicode
- \HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue
\HyPsd@PrerenderUnicode{#1}%
\pdfstringdef\@pdfkeywords{#1}%
}
@@ -6727,7 +6644,6 @@
\def\HyInfo@tmp##1{%
\kv@define@key{pdfinfo}{##1}{%
\HyXeTeX@CheckUnicode
- \HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue
\HyPsd@PrerenderUnicode{####1}%
\pdfstringdef\HyInfo@Value{####1}%
\global\expandafter
@@ -19832,7 +19748,6 @@
\Hy@unicodefalse
\fi
\fi
- \HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue
\pdfstringdef\Hy@gtemp#1%
\endgroup
\let#1\Hy@gtemp
@@ -20324,7 +20239,6 @@
\let\partnumberline\@gobble
\let\chapternumberline\@gobble
\fi
- \HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue
\pdfstringdef\Hy@tempa{#2}%
\HyPsd@SanitizeForOutFile\Hy@tempa
\if@filesw
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 5af41f0ccd..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/manual.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/manual.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ded7aeb799
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/manual.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,3383 @@
+% This is the manual for the LaTeX hyperref package.
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1998-2003 Sebastian Rahtz.
+% Copyright (C) 2003 Steve Peter and Karl Berry
+% Copyright (C) 2006-2012 Heiko Oberdiek.
+% Copyright (C) 2017-2019 David Carlisle Ulrike Fischer
+% Copyright (C) 2019-2020 The LaTeX3 Project
+%
+% Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+% under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
+% any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
+% Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
+% Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled
+% ``GNU Free Documentation License.''
+%
+
+\def\mydate{January 2020}
+
+\RequirePackage{iftex}
+\ifpdf % We are running pdfTeX in pdf mode
+\ifx\directlua\undefinded
+\documentclass[pdftex]{article}
+\else
+\documentclass[luatex]{article}
+\fi
+\else
+\documentclass{article}
+\fi
+
+
+\usepackage{pifont}
+\usepackage{calc}
+
+\usepackage{hologo}
+
+\def\OzTeX{O\kern-0.03em z\kern-0.15em \TeX}
+
+\newcommand*{\cs}[1]{%
+ \texttt{\textbackslash #1}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\xpackage}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\xoption}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+% from doc.sty
+\makeatletter
+\ifx\l@nohyphenation\@undefined
+\newlanguage\l@nohyphenation
+\fi
+\ifx\l@nohyphenation\@undefined
+ \newlanguage\l@nohyphenation
+\fi
+\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{%
+ \ensuremath\langle
+ \ifmmode \expandafter \nfss@text \fi
+ {%
+ \meta@font@select
+ \edef\meta@hyphen@restore
+ {\hyphenchar\the\font\the\hyphenchar\font}%
+ \hyphenchar\font\m@ne
+ \language\l@nohyphenation
+ #1\/%
+ \meta@hyphen@restore
+ }%
+ \ensuremath\rangle
+}
+\def\meta@font@select{\ttfamily\itshape}
+\makeatother
+
+% Page layout.
+\advance\textwidth by 1.1in
+\advance\oddsidemargin by -.55in
+\advance\evensidemargin by -.55in
+%
+\advance\textheight by 1in
+\advance\topmargin by -.5in
+\advance\footskip by -.5in
+%
+\pagestyle{headings}
+%
+% Avoid some overfull boxes.
+\emergencystretch=.1\hsize
+\hbadness = 3000
+
+% these are from lshort.sty, but lshort.sty pulls in so many other
+% packages it seems cleaner to just include them here.
+%
+\newcommand{\bs}{\symbol{'134}}%Print backslash
+\newcommand{\ci}[1]{\texttt{\bs#1}}
+
+\makeatletter
+\@ifpackageloaded{tex4ht}{%
+ % separate definition for HTML case to avoid
+ % nasty borders with double horizontal lines with
+ % large gaps.
+ \newsavebox{\cmdsyntaxbox}%
+ \newenvironment{cmdsyntax}{%
+ \par
+ % \small
+ \addvspace{3.2ex plus 0.8ex minus 0.2ex}%
+ \vskip -\parskip
+ \noindent
+ \begin{lrbox}{\cmdsyntaxbox}%
+ \begin{tabular}{l}%
+ \rule{0pt}{1em}%
+ \ignorespaces
+ }{%
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \end{lrbox}%
+ \fbox{\usebox{\cmdsyntaxbox}}%
+ \par
+ \nopagebreak
+ \addvspace{3.2ex plus 0.8ex minus 0.2ex}%
+ \vskip -\parskip
+ }%
+}{%
+ \newenvironment{cmdsyntax}{%
+ \par
+ \small
+ \addvspace{3.2ex plus 0.8ex minus 0.2ex}%
+ \vskip -\parskip
+ \noindent
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|}%
+ \hline
+ \rule{0pt}{1em}%
+ \ignorespaces
+ }{%
+ \\%
+ \hline
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \par
+ \nopagebreak
+ \addvspace{3.2ex plus 0.8ex minus 0.2ex}%
+ \vskip -\parskip
+ }%
+}
+\makeatother
+
+\usepackage{array,longtable}
+\ifnum 0\ifluatex 1\else\ifxetex 1\fi\fi=0 %
+ \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}%
+ \usepackage{lmodern}%
+ \renewcommand*{\ttdefault}{lmvtt}%
+\else
+ \usepackage{fontspec}%
+ \renewcommand*{\ttdefault}{lmvtt}%
+\fi
+
+\newcommand*{\Quote}[1]{\textquotedblleft#1\textquotedblright}
+
+\def\Hanh{H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}} Th\`anh}
+
+\ifpdf
+ \usepackage[%
+% pdftex,% might be luatex, just allow automatic default
+ colorlinks,%
+ hyperindex,%
+ plainpages=false,%
+ bookmarksopen,%
+ bookmarksnumbered,
+ pdfusetitle,%
+ ]{hyperref}
+ %%?? \def\pdfBorderAttrs{/Border [0 0 0] } % No border arround Links
+\else
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\fi
+
+\makeatletter
+\@ifpackageloaded{tex4ht}{%
+\author{Sebastian Rahtz (deceased)\and
+ Heiko Oberdiek (inactive)\and
+ The \LaTeX3 Project (\url{https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues})}
+}{%
+ \usepackage{bmhydoc}%
+\author{Sebastian Rahtz\thanks{deceased}\and
+ Heiko Oberdiek\thanks{inactive}\and
+ The \LaTeX3 Project\thanks{\url{https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues}}}
+}
+\makeatother
+\title{Hypertext marks in \hologo{LaTeX}: a manual for \xpackage{hyperref}}
+\date{2020-05-15 v7.00e}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% comes out too close to the toc, and we know it's page one anyway.
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}% for bookmark levels
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+The package derives from, and builds on, the work of the Hyper\hologo{TeX}
+project, described at \texttt{http://xxx.lanl.gov/hypertex/}\footnote{Now: \url{https://ctan.org/tex-archive/support/hypertex/hypertex}}. It extends
+the functionality of all the \hologo{LaTeX} cross-referencing commands
+(including the table of contents, bibliographies etc) to produce
+\cs{special} commands which a driver can turn into hypertext links;
+it also provides new commands to allow the user to write \emph{ad hoc}
+hypertext links, including those to external documents and URLs.
+
+The package is currently maintained at \url{https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/} and issues should
+be reported there.
+
+This manual provides a brief overview of the \xpackage{hyperref}
+package. For more details, you should read the additional documentation
+distributed with the package, as well as the complete documentation by
+processing \texttt{hyperref.dtx}. You should also read the chapter on
+\xpackage{hyperref} in \textit{The \hologo{LaTeX} Web Companion}, where you will
+find additional examples.
+
+The Hyper\hologo{TeX} specification\footnote{This is borrowed from an article
+by Arthur Smith.} says that conformant viewers/translators must
+recognize the following set of \cs{special} constructs:
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[href:] \verb|html:<a href = "href_string">|
+\item[name:] \verb|html:<a name = "name_string">|
+\item[end:] \verb|html:</a>|
+\item[image:] \verb|html:<img src = "href_string">|
+\item[base\_name:] \verb|html:<base href = "href_string">|
+\end{description}
+
+The \emph{href}, \emph{name} and \emph{end} commands are used to do the
+basic hypertext operations of establishing links between sections of
+documents. The \emph{image} command is intended (as with current HTML
+viewers) to place an image of arbitrary graphical format on the page in
+the current location. The \emph{base\_name} command is be used to
+communicate to the DVI viewer the full (URL) location of the current
+document so that files specified by relative URLs may be retrieved
+correctly.
+
+The \emph{href} and \emph{name} commands must be paired with an
+\emph{end} command later in the \TeX\ file---the \TeX\ commands between
+the two ends of a pair form an \emph{anchor} in the document. In the
+case of an \emph{href} command, the \emph{anchor} is to be highlighted
+in the \emph{DVI viewer}, and when clicked on will cause the scene to
+shift to the destination specified by \emph{href\_string}. The
+\emph{anchor} associated with a name command represents a possible
+location to which other hypertext links may refer, either as local
+references (of the form \verb|href="#name_string"| with the
+\emph{name\_string} identical to the one in the name command) or as part
+of a URL (of the form \emph{URL\#name\_string}). Here
+\emph{href\_string} is a valid URL or local identifier, while
+\emph{name\_string} could be any string at all: the only caveat is that
+`$\verb|"|$' characters should be escaped with a backslash
+($\backslash$), and if it looks like a URL name it may cause problems.
+
+However, the drivers intended to produce \emph{only} PDF use literal
+PostScript or PDF \verb|\special| commands. The commands are defined in
+configuration files for different drivers, selected by package options;
+at present, the following drivers are supported:
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[hypertex] DVI processors conforming to the Hyper\TeX\ guidelines (i.e.\ \textsf{xdvi}, \textsf{dvips} (with
+the \textsf{-z} option), \textsf{\OzTeX}, and \textsf{Textures})
+\item[dvips] produces \verb|\special| commands tailored for \textsf{dvips}
+\item[dvipsone] produces \verb|\special| commands tailored for \textsf{dvipsone}
+\item[ps2pdf] a special case of output suitable for processing by earlier versions of Ghost\-script's
+PDF writer; this is basically the same as that for \textsf{dvips}, but a few variations remained before version 5.21
+\item[tex4ht] produces \verb|\special| commands for use with \textsf{\TeX4ht}
+\item[pdftex] pdf\TeX, \Hanh{}'s \TeX{} variant that writes PDF directly
+\item[luatex] lua\TeX, Unicode \TeX{} variant that writes PDF directly
+\item[dvipdfm] produces \verb|\special| commands for Mark Wicks' DVI to PDF driver \textsf{dvipdfm}
+\item[dvipdfmx] produces \verb|\special| commands for driver
+ \textsf{dvipdfmx}, a successor of \textsf{dvipdfm}
+\item[dviwindo] produces \verb|\special| commands that Y\&Y's Windows previewer interprets as hypertext jumps within the previewer
+\item[vtex] produces \verb|\special| commands that MicroPress' HTML and
+ PDF-producing \TeX\ variants interpret as hypertext jumps within the
+ previewer
+\item[textures] produces \verb|\special| commands that \textsf{Textures} interprets as hypertext jumps within the previewer
+\item[xetex] produces \verb|\special| commands for Xe\TeX{}
+\end{description}
+
+Output from \textsf{dvips} or \textsf{dvipsone} must be processed using
+Acrobat Distiller to obtain a PDF file.\footnote{Make sure you turn off
+the partial font downloading supported by \textsf{dvips} and
+\textsf{dvipsone} in favor of Distiller's own system.} The result is
+generally preferable to that produced by using the \textsf{hypertex}
+driver, and then processing with \textsf{dvips -z}, but the DVI file is
+not portable. The main advantage of using the Hyper\TeX\ \ci{special}
+commands is that you can also use the document in hypertext DVI viewers,
+such as \textsf{xdvi}.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[driverfallback]
+ If a driver is not given and cannot be autodetected, then use
+ the driver option, given as value to this option \textsf{driverfallback}.
+ Example:
+ \begin{quote}
+ \texttt{driverfallback=dvipdfm}
+ \end{quote}
+ Autodetected drivers (\textsf{pdftex}, \textsf{xetex}, \textsf{vtex},
+ \textsf{vtexpdfmark}) are recognized from within \TeX\ and
+ therefore cannot be given as value to option \textsf{driverfallback}.
+ However a DVI driver program is run after the \TeX\ run is finished.
+ Thus it cannot be detected at \TeX\ macro level. Then package
+ \xpackage{hyperref}
+ uses the driver, given by \textsf{driverfallback}. If the driver
+ is already specified or can be autodetected, then option
+ \textsf{driverfallback} is ignored.
+\end{description}
+
+\section{Implicit behavior}
+
+This package can be used with more or less any normal \LaTeX\ document
+by specifying in the document preamble
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Make sure it comes \emph{last} of your loaded packages, to give it a
+fighting chance of not being over-written, since its job is to redefine
+many \LaTeX\ commands. Hopefully you will find that all cross-references
+work correctly as hypertext. For example, \ci{section} commands will
+produce a bookmark and a link, whereas \ci{section*} commands will only
+show links when paired with a corresponding \ci{addcontentsline}
+command.
+
+In addition, the \texttt{hyperindex} option (see below) attempts to make
+items in the index by hyperlinked back to the text, and the option
+\texttt{backref} inserts extra `back' links into the bibliography for
+each entry. Other options control the appearance of links, and give
+extra control over PDF output. For example, \texttt{colorlinks}, as its
+name well implies, colors the links instead of using boxes; this is the
+option used in this document.
+
+
+\section{Package options}
+
+All user-configurable aspects of \xpackage{hyperref} are set using a
+single `key=value' scheme (using the \xpackage{keyval} package) with the
+key \texttt{Hyp}. The options can be set either in the optional argument
+to the \cs{usepackage} command, or using the \cs{hypersetup}
+macro. When the package is loaded, a file \texttt{hyperref.cfg} is read
+if it can be found, and this is a convenient place to set options on a
+site-wide basis.
+
+Note however that some options (for example \texttt{unicode}) can only be used as
+packge options, and not in \verb|\hypersetup| as the option settings are processed
+as the package is read.
+
+As an example, the behavior of a particular file could be controlled by:
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item a site-wide \texttt{hyperref.cfg} setting up the look of links,
+adding backreferencing, and setting a PDF display default:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\hypersetup{backref,
+pdfpagemode=FullScreen,
+colorlinks=true}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\item A global option in the file, which is passed down to
+\textsf{hyperref}:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[dvips]{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\item File-specific options in the \cs{usepackage} commands, which
+override the ones set in \texttt{hyperref.cfg}:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[colorlinks=false]{hyperref}
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={A Perfect Day}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{itemize}
+
+As seen in the previous example, information entries
+(pdftitle, pdfauthor, \dots) should be set after the package is loaded.
+Otherwise \LaTeX\ expands the values of these options prematurely.
+Also \LaTeX\ strips spaces in options. Especially option `pdfborder'
+requires some care. Curly braces protect the value, if given
+as package option. They are not necessary in \verb|\hypersetup|.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[pdfborder={0 0 0}]{hyperref}
+\hypersetup{pdfborder=0 0 0}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Package `kvoptions-patch' patches \LaTeX\ to make it aware
+of key value options and to prevent premature value expansions.
+
+Some options can be given at any time, but many are restricted: before
+\verb|\begin{document}|, only in \verb|\usepackage[...]{hyperref}|,
+before first use, etc.
+
+In the key descriptions that follow, many options do not need a value,
+as they default to the value true if used. These are the ones classed as
+`boolean'. The values true and false can always be specified, however.
+
+\subsection{General options}
+
+Firstly, the options to specify general behavior and page size.
+
+\medskip
+\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}ll}
+draft & boolean & false & all hypertext options are turned off \\
+final & boolean & true & all hypertext options are turned on \\
+debug & boolean & false & extra diagnostic messages are printed in \\
+ & & & the log file \\
+verbose & boolean & false & same as debug \\
+implicit & boolean & true & redefines \LaTeX\ internals \\
+setpagesize & boolean & true & sets page size by special driver commands
+\end{longtable}
+
+\subsection{Options for destination names}
+
+Destinations names (also anchor, target or link names) are internal
+names that identify a position on a page in the document. They
+are used in link targets for inner document links or the bookmarks,
+for example.
+
+Usually anchor are set, if \cs{refstepcounter} is called.
+Thus there is a counter name and value. Both are used to
+construct the destination name. By default the counter value
+follows the counter name separated by a dot. Example for
+the fourth chapter:
+\begin{quote}
+ \verb|chapter.4|
+\end{quote}
+This scheme is used by:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\cs{autoref}] displays the description label for the
+ reference depending on the counter name.
+\item[\cs{hyperpage}] is used by the index to get
+page links. Page anchor setting (\verb|pageanchor|) must not
+be turned off.
+\end{description}
+
+It is very important that the destination names are unique,
+because two destinations must not share the same name.
+The counter value \cs{the<counter>} is not always unique
+for the counter. For example, table and figures can be numbered
+inside the chapter without having the chapter number in their
+number. Therefore \xpackage{hyperref} has introduced \cs{theH<counter>}
+that allows a unique counter value without messing up with
+the appearance of the counter number. For example, the number
+of the second table in the third chapter might be printed
+as \texttt{2}, the result of \cs{thetable}. But the
+destination name \texttt{table.2.4} is unique because it
+has used \cs{theHtable} that gives \verb|2.4| in this case.
+
+Often the user do not need to set \cs{theH<counter>}. Defaults
+for standard cases (chapter, \dots) are provided. And after \xpackage{hyperref}
+is loaded, new counters with parent counters also define
+\cs{theH<counter>} automatically, if \cs{newcounter}, \cs{@addtoreset}
+or \cs{numberwithin} of package \xpackage{amsmath} are used.
+
+Usually problems with duplicate destination names can be solved
+by an appropriate definition of \cs{theH<counter>}. If option
+\texttt{hypertexnames} is disabled, then a unique artificial
+number is used instead of the counter value. In case of page
+anchors the absolute page anchor is used. With option \texttt{plainpages}
+the page anchors use the arabic form. In both latter cases \cs{hyperpage}
+for index links is affected and might not work properly.
+
+If an unnumbered entity gets an anchor (starred forms of
+chapters, sections, \dots) or \cs{phantomsection} is used,
+then the dummy counter name \texttt{section*} and an artificial
+unique number is used.
+
+If the final PDF file is going to be merged with another file, than
+the destination names might clash, because both documents might
+contain \texttt{chapter.1} or \texttt{page.1}. Also \xpackage{hyperref}
+sets anchor with name \texttt{Doc-Start} at the begin of the document.
+This can be resolved by redefining \cs{HyperDestNameFilter}.
+Package \xpackage{hyperref} calls this macro each time, it uses a
+destination name.
+The macro must be expandable and expects the destination name
+as only argument. As example, the macro is redefined to add
+a prefix to all destination names:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{\jobname-#1}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+In document \texttt{docA} the destination name \texttt{chapter.2}
+becomes \texttt{docA-chapter.2}.
+
+Destination names can also be used from the outside in URIs(, if the
+driver has not removed or changed them), for example:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+http://somewhere/path/file.pdf#nameddest=chapter.4
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+However using a number seems unhappy. If another chapter is added
+before, the number changes. But it is very difficult to pass
+a new name for the destination to the anchor setting process that
+is usually deep hidden in the internals. The first name of
+\cs{label} after the anchor setting seems a good approximation:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \section{Introduction}
+ \label{intro}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+Option \texttt{destlabel} checks for each \cs{label}, if there is
+a new destination name active and replaces the destination
+name by the label name. Because the destination name is already in use
+because of the anchor setting, the new name is recorded in the \texttt{.aux}
+file and used in the subsequent \hologo{LaTeX} run. The renaming is done by
+a redefinition of \cs{HyperDestNameFilter}. That leaves the old
+destination names intact (e.g., they are needed for \cs{autoref}).
+This redefinition is also available as \cs{HyperDestLabelReplace},
+thus that an own redefinition can use it.
+The following example also adds a prefix for \emph{all} destination names:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{%
+ \jobname-\HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}%
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The other case that only files prefixed that do not have a corresponding
+\cs{label} is more complicate, because \cs{HyperDestLabelReplace} needs
+the unmodified destination name as argument. This is solved by an
+expandable string test (\cs{pdfstrcmp} of \hologo{pdfTeX}
+or \cs{strcmp} of \hologo{XeTeX}, package \xpackage{pdftexcmds} also supports
+\hologo{LuaTeX}):
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{pdftexcmds}
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{%
+ \ifcase\pdf@strcmp{#1}{\HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}} %
+ \jobname-#1%
+ \else
+ \HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}%
+ \fi
+}
+\makeatother
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+With option \texttt{destlabel} destinations can also named manually,
+if the destination is not yet renamed:
+\begin{quote}
+\verb|\HyperDestRename{|\meta{destination}\verb|}{|\meta{newname}\verb|}|
+\end{quote}
+
+Hint: Anchors can also be named and set by \cs{hypertarget}.
+
+\medskip
+\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}ll}
+destlabel & boolean & false & destinations are named by first \cs{label}\\
+ & & & after anchor creation\\
+hypertexnames & boolean & true & use guessable names for links \\
+naturalnames & boolean & false & use \LaTeX-computed names for links \\
+plainpages & boolean & false & Forces page anchors to be named by the Arabic form \\
+ & & & of the page number, rather than the formatted form. \\
+\end{longtable}
+
+\subsection{Configuration options}
+
+\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{9cm}}
+raiselinks & boolean & true & In the hypertex driver, the height of links is normally calculated by the driver as
+ simply the base line of contained text; this options forces \verb|\special| commands to
+ reflect the real height of the link (which could contain a graphic) \\
+breaklinks & boolean & false & Allows link text to break across lines; since this cannot be accommodated in PDF, it is
+ only set true by default if the pdftex driver is used. This makes links on multiple lines
+ into different PDF links to the same target. \\
+pageanchor & boolean & true & Determines whether every page is given an implicit anchor at the top left corner. If this
+ is turned off, \verb|\printindex| will not contain
+ valid hyperlinks. \\
+nesting & boolean & false & Allows links to be nested; no drivers currently support this.
+\end{longtable}
+
+Note for option \verb|breaklinks|:
+The correct value is automatically set according to the driver features.
+It can be overwritten for drivers that do not support broken links.
+However, at any case, the link area will be wrong and displaced.
+
+\subsection{Backend drivers}
+
+If no driver is specified, the package tries to find a driver in
+the following order:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Autodetection, some \TeX\ processors can be detected at \TeX\ macro
+ level (pdf\TeX, Xe\TeX, V\TeX).
+\item Option \textsf{driverfallback}. If this option is set, its value
+ is taken as driver option.
+\item Macro \cs{Hy@defaultdriver}. The macro takes a driver file
+ name (without file extension).
+\item Package default is \textsf{hypertex}.
+\end{enumerate}
+Many distributions are using a driver file \texttt{hypertex.cfg} that
+define \cs{Hy@defaultdriver} with \texttt{hdvips}. This is recommended
+because driver \textsf{dvips} provides much more features than
+\textsf{hypertex} for PDF generation.
+
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}lp{.8\hsize}@{}}
+driverfallback & Its value is used as driver option\\
+ & if the driver is not given or autodetected.\\
+dvipdfm & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dvipdfm} driver.\\
+dvipdfmx & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dvipdfmx} driver.\\
+dvips & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dvips} driver. \\
+dvipsone & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dvipsone} driver. \\
+dviwindo & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dviwindo} Windows previewer. \\
+hypertex & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the Hyper\TeX-compliant drivers. \\
+latex2html & Redefines a few macros for compatibility with \textsf{latex2html}. \\
+nativepdf & An alias for \textsf{dvips} \\
+pdfmark & An alias for \textsf{dvips} \\
+pdftex & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{pdftex} program.\\
+ps2pdf & Redefines a few macros for compatibility with
+ Ghostscript's PDF writer, otherwise identical to
+ \textsf{dvips}. \\
+tex4ht & For use with \textsf{\TeX4ht} \\
+textures & For use with \textsf{Textures} \\
+vtex & For use with MicroPress' \textsf{VTeX}; the PDF
+ and HTML backends are detected automatically. \\
+vtexpdfmark & For use with \textsf{VTeX}'s PostScript backend. \\
+xetex & For use with Xe\TeX\ (using backend for dvipdfm).
+\end{longtable}
+\smallskip
+
+If you use \textsf{dviwindo}, you may need to redefine the macro
+\ci{wwwbrowser} (the default is \verb|C:\netscape\netscape|) to tell
+\textsf{dviwindo} what program to launch. Thus, users of Internet
+Explorer might add something like this to hyperref.cfg:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand{\wwwbrowser}{C:\string\Program\space
+ Files\string\Plus!\string\Microsoft\space
+ Internet\string\iexplore.exe}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Extension options}
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{8cm}@{}}
+extension & text & & Set the file extension (e.g.\ \textsf{dvi}) which will be appended to file links
+ created if you use the \xpackage{xr} package. \\
+hyperfigures & boolean & & \\
+backref & text & false & Adds `backlink' text to the end of each item in the bibliography, as a list of
+ section numbers. This can only work properly \emph{if} there is a blank line after
+ each \verb|\bibitem|. Supported values are \verb|section|, \verb|slide|, \verb|page|,
+ \verb|none|, or \verb|false|. If no value is given, \verb|section| is taken as default.\\
+pagebackref & boolean & false & Adds `backlink' text to the end of each item in the bibliography, as a list of page
+ numbers. \\
+hyperindex & boolean & true & Makes the page numbers of index entries into hyperlinks. Relays on unique
+ page anchors (\verb|pageanchor|, \ldots)
+ \verb|pageanchors| and \verb|plainpages=false|. \\
+hyperfootnotes & boolean & true & Makes the footnote marks into hyperlinks to the footnote text.
+ Easily broken \ldots\\
+encap & & & Sets encap character for hyperindex \\
+linktoc & text & section & make text (\verb|section|), page number (\verb|page|), both (\verb|all|) or nothing (\verb|none|) be link on TOC, LOF and LOT \\
+linktocpage & boolean & false & make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF and LOT \\
+breaklinks & boolean & false & allow links to break over lines by making links over multiple lines into PDF links to
+ the same target \\
+colorlinks & boolean & false & Colors the text of links and anchors. The colors chosen depend on the the type of
+ link. At present the only types of link distinguished are citations, page references,
+ URLs, local file references, and other links.
+ Unlike colored boxes, the colored
+ text remains when printing.\\
+linkcolor & color & red & Color for normal internal links. \\
+anchorcolor & color & black & Color for anchor text. Ignored by most drivers. \\
+citecolor & color & green & Color for bibliographical citations in text. \\
+filecolor & color & cyan & Color for URLs which open local files. \\
+menucolor & color & red & Color for Acrobat menu items. \\
+runcolor & color & filecolor & Color for run links (launch annotations). \\
+urlcolor & color & magenta & Color for linked URLs. \\
+allcolors & color & & Set all color options (without border and field options).\\
+frenchlinks & boolean & false & Use small caps instead of color for links.\\
+hidelinks & & & Hide links (removing color and border). \\
+\end{longtable} \smallskip
+
+Note that all color names must be defined before use, following the
+normal system of the standard \LaTeX\ \xpackage{color} package.
+
+\subsection{PDF-specific display options}
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{7.6cm}@{}}
+bookmarks & boolean & true & A set of Acrobat bookmarks are written, in a manner similar to the
+ table of contents, requiring two passes of \LaTeX. Some postprocessing
+ of the bookmark file (file extension \texttt{.out}) may be needed to
+ translate \LaTeX\ codes, since bookmarks must be written in PDFEncoding.
+ To aid this process, the \texttt{.out} file is not rewritten by \LaTeX\
+ if it is edited to contain a line \verb|\let\WriteBookmarks\relax| \\
+bookmarksopen & boolean & false & If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, show them with all the subtrees
+ expanded. \\
+bookmarksopenlevel & parameter & & level (\ci{maxdimen}) to which bookmarks are open \\
+bookmarksnumbered & boolean & false & If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, include section numbers. \\
+bookmarkstype & text & toc & to specify which `toc' file to mimic \\
+CJKbookmarks & boolean & false &
+ This option should be used to produce CJK bookmarks.
+ Package \verb|hyperref|
+ supports both normal and preprocessed mode of the \xpackage{CJK} package;
+ during the creation of bookmarks, it simply replaces CJK's macros
+ with special versions which expand to the corresponding character
+ codes. Note that without the `unicode' option of hyperref you get
+ PDF files which actually violate the PDF specification because
+ non-Unicode character codes are used -- some PDF readers localized
+ for CJK languages (most notably Acroread itself) support this.
+ Also note that option `CJKbookmarks' cannot be used together
+ with option `unicode'.
+
+ No mechanism is provided to translate non-Unicode bookmarks to
+ Unicode; for portable PDF documents only Unicode encoding should
+ be used.\\
+pdfhighlight & name & /I & How link buttons behave when selected; /I is for inverse (the default);
+ the other possibilities are /N (no effect), /O (outline), and /P (inset
+ highlighting). \\
+citebordercolor & RGB color & 0 1 0 & The color of the box around citations \\
+filebordercolor & RGB color & 0 .5 .5 & The color of the box around links to files \\
+linkbordercolor & RGB color & 1 0 0 & The color of the box around normal links \\
+menubordercolor & RGB color & 1 0 0 & The color of the box around Acrobat menu links \\
+urlbordercolor & RGB color & 0 1 1 & The color of the box around links to URLs \\
+runbordercolor & RGB color & 0 .7 .7 & Color of border around `run' links \\
+allbordercolors & & & Set all border color options \\
+pdfborder & & 0 0 1 & The style of box around links; defaults to a box with lines of 1pt thickness,
+ but the colorlinks option resets it to produce no border.
+\end{longtable}
+
+Note that the color of link borders can be specified \emph{only} as 3
+numbers in the range 0..1, giving an RGB color. You cannot use colors
+defined in \TeX. Since version 6.76a this is no longer true.
+Especially with the help of package \xpackage{xcolor} the usual
+color specifications of package \xpackage{(x)color} can be used.
+For further information see description of package \xpackage{hycolor}.
+
+The bookmark commands are stored in a file called
+\textit{jobname}\texttt{.out}. The files is not processed by \LaTeX\ so
+any markup is passed through. You can postprocess this file as needed;
+as an aid for this, the \texttt{.out} file is not overwritten on the
+next \TeX\ run if it is edited to contain the line
+\begin{verbatim}
+\let\WriteBookmarks\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{PDF display and information options}
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}l>{\raggedright}p{\widthof{key value}}>{\itshape}lp{7cm}@{}}
+baseurl & URL & & Sets the base URL of the PDF document \\
+pdfpagemode & name & empty & Determines how the file is opening in Acrobat; the possibilities are
+ \verb|UseNone|, \verb|UseThumbs| (show thumbnails), \verb|UseOutlines|
+ (show bookmarks), \verb|FullScreen|, \verb|UseOC| (PDF 1.5),
+ and \verb|UseAttachments| (PDF 1.6). If no mode if explicitly chosen, but the
+ bookmarks option is set, \verb|UseOutlines| is used. \\
+pdftitle & text & & Sets the document information Title field \\
+pdfauthor & text & & Sets the document information Author field \\
+pdfsubject & text & & Sets the document information Subject field \\
+pdfcreator & text & & Sets the document information Creator field \\
+addtopdfproducer & text & & Adds additional text to the document information Producer field \\
+pdfkeywords & text & & Sets the document information Keywords field \\
+pdftrapped & name & empty & Sets the document information Trapped entry. Possible values are \verb|True|, \verb|False| and \verb|Unknown|.
+ An empty value means, the entry is not set.\\
+%
+pdfinfo & key value list & empty & Alternative interface for setting the
+ document information.\\
+pdfview & name & XYZ & Sets the default PDF `view' for each link \\
+pdfstartpage & integer & 1 & Determines on which page the PDF file is opened. An empty value means, the entry is not set.\\
+pdfstartview & name & Fit & Set the startup page view \\
+pdfremotestartview & name & Fit & Set the startup page view of remote PDF files \\
+pdfpagescrop & n n n n & & Sets the default PDF crop box for pages. This should be a set of four numbers \\
+pdfcenterwindow & boolean & false & position the document window in the center of the screen \\
+pdfdirection & name & empty & direction setting. Possible values: \verb|L2R| (left to right) and
+ \verb|R2L| (right to left)\\
+pdfdisplaydoctitle & boolean & false & display document title instead of file name in title bar\\
+pdfduplex & name & empty & paper handling option for print dialog. Possible vatues are:
+ \verb|Simplex| (print single-sided),
+ \verb|DuplexFlipShortEdge| (duplex and flip on the short edge of the sheet),
+ \verb|DuplexFlipLongEdge| (duplex and flip on the long edge of the sheet)\\
+
+pdffitwindow & boolean & false & resize document window to fit document size \\
+pdflang & name & relax & PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)\\
+pdfmenubar & boolean & true & make PDF viewer's menu bar visible \\
+pdfnewwindow & boolean & false & make links that open another PDF file start a new window \\
+pdfnonfullscreenpagemode
+ & name & empty & page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode. Possible values are
+ \verb|UseNone|, \verb|UseOutlines|, \verb|UseThumbs|, and \verb|UseOC|\\
+pdfnumcopies & integer & empty & number of printed copies \\
+pdfpagelayout & name & empty & set layout of PDF pages. Possible values:
+ \verb|SinglePage|, \verb|OneColumn|,
+ \verb|TwoColumnLeft|, \verb|TwoColumnRight|,
+ \verb|TwoPageLeft|, and \verb|TwoPageRight| \\
+pdfpagelabels & boolean & true & set PDF page labels \\
+pdfpagetransition & name & empty & set PDF page transition style. Possible values are
+ \verb|Split|, \verb|Blinds|, \verb|Box|, \verb|Wipe|,
+ \verb|Dissolve|, \verb|Glitter|, \verb|R|,
+ \verb|Fly|, \verb|Push|,
+ \verb|Cover|, \verb|Uncover|,
+ \verb|Fade|.
+ The default according to the PDF~Reference is \verb|R|,
+ which simply replaces the old page with the new one. \\
+pdfpicktraybypdfsize
+ & boolean & false & specify whether PDF page size is used to select input paper tray in print dialog \\
+pdfprintarea & name & empty & set /PrintArea of viewer preferences. Possible values are
+ \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|,
+ \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|.
+ The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\
+pdfprintclip & name & empty & set /PrintClip of viewer preferences. Possible values are
+ \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|,
+ \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|.
+ The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\
+pdfprintpagerange & n n (n n)*
+ & empty & set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences\\
+pdfprintscaling & name & empty & page scaling option for print dialog
+ (option /PrintScaling of viewer
+ preferences, PDF 1.6);
+ valid values are \verb|None| and
+ \verb|AppDefault| \\
+pdftoolbar & boolean & true & make PDF toolbar visible \\
+pdfviewarea & name & empty & set /ViewArea of viewer preferences. Possible values are
+ \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|,
+ \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|.
+ The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\
+pdfviewclip & name & empty & set /ViewClip of viewer preferences Possible values are
+ \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|,
+ \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|.
+ The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\
+pdfwindowui & boolean & true & make PDF user interface elements visible \\
+unicode & boolean & false & Unicode encoded PDF strings
+\end{longtable}
+
+Each link in Acrobat carries its own magnification level, which is set
+using PDF coordinate space, which is not the same as \TeX's. The unit
+is bp and the origin is in the lower left corner. See also
+\verb|\hypercalcbp| that is explained on page \pageref{hypercalcbp}.
+pdf\TeX\
+works by supplying default values for \texttt{XYZ} (horizontal $\times$
+vertical $\times$ zoom) and \texttt{FitBH}. However, drivers using
+\texttt{pdfmark} do not supply defaults, so \textsf{hyperref} passes in
+a value of -32768, which causes Acrobat to set (usually) sensible
+defaults. The following are possible values for the \texttt{pdfview},
+\texttt{pdfstartview} and \texttt{pdfremotestartview} parameters.
+
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}l>{\itshape}lp{7cm}@{}}
+XYZ & left top zoom & Sets a coordinate and a zoom factor. If any one is null, the source link value is used.
+ \textit{null null null} will give the same values as the current page. \\
+Fit & & Fits the page to the window. \\
+FitH & top & Fits the width of the page to the window. \\
+FitV & left & Fits the height of the page to the window. \\
+FitR & left bottom right top & Fits the rectangle specified by the four coordinates to the window. \\
+FitB & & Fits the page bounding box to the window. \\
+FitBH & top & Fits the width of the page bounding box to the window. \\
+FitBV & left & Fits the height of the page bounding box to the window. \\
+\end{longtable}
+
+The \texttt{pdfpagelayout} can be one of the following values.
+
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}lp{10cm}@{}}
+SinglePage & Displays a single page; advancing flips the page \\
+OneColumn & Displays the document in one column; continuous scrolling. \\
+TwoColumnLeft & Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to the left. \\
+TwoColumnRight & Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to the right.\\
+TwoPageLeft & Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the left (since PDF 1.5).\\
+TwoPageRight & Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the right (since PDF 1.5).
+\end{longtable}
+
+Finally, the \texttt{pdfpagetransition} can be one of the following
+values, where \textit{/Di} stands for direction of motion in degrees,
+generally in 90$^{\circ}$\ steps, \textit{/Dm} is a horizontal
+(\texttt{/H}) or vertical (\texttt{/V}) dimension (e.g.\ \texttt{Blinds
+/Dm /V}), and \textit{/M} is for motion, either in (\texttt{/I}) or out
+(\texttt{/O}).
+
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}llp{8.5cm}@{}}
+Blinds & /Dm & Multiple lines distributed evenly across the screen sweep in the same direction to reveal the new
+ page. \\
+Box & /M & A box sweeps in or out. \\
+Dissolve & & The page image dissolves in a piecemeal fashion to reveal the new page. \\
+Glitter & /Di & Similar to Dissolve, except the effect sweeps across the screen. \\
+Split & /Dm /M & Two lines sweep across the screen to reveal the new page. \\
+Wipe & /Di & A single line sweeps across the screen to reveal the new page. \\
+R & & Simply replaces the old page with the new one. \\
+Fly & /Di /M & Changes are flown out or in (as specified by /M), in the direction
+ specified by /Di, to or from a location that is
+ offscreen except when /Di is None. \\
+Push & /Di & The old page slides off the screen while the new page slides in,
+ pushing the old page out in the direction
+ specified by /Di. \\
+Cover & /Di & The new page slides on to the screen in the direction specified
+ by /Di, covering the old page. \\
+Uncover & /Di & The old page slides off the screen in the direction specified by
+ /Di, uncovering the new page in the direction
+ specified by /Di. \\
+Fade & & The new page gradually becomes visible through the old one.
+
+\end{longtable}
+
+\subsection{Option \texttt{pdfinfo}}
+
+The information entries can be set using \texttt{pdftitle},
+\texttt{pdfsubject}, \dots. Option \texttt{pdfinfo} provides an alternative
+interface. It takes a key value list. The key names are the names that
+appear in the PDF information dictionary directly. Known keys such as
+\texttt{Title}, \texttt{Subject}, \texttt{Trapped} and other are mapped to
+options \texttt{pdftitle}, \texttt{subject}, \texttt{trapped}, \dots
+Unknown keys are added to the information dictionary. Their values are text
+strings (see PDF specification).
+Example:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\hypersetup{
+ pdfinfo={
+ Title={My Title},
+ Subject={My Subject},
+ NewKey={Foobar},
+ % ...
+ }
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsection{Big alphabetical list}
+
+The following is a complete listing of available options for
+\textsf{hyperref}, arranged alphabetically.
+
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}llp{7cm}@{}}
+allbordercolors & & Set all border color options\\
+allcolors & & Set all color options (without border and field options)\\
+anchorcolor & \textit{black} & set color of anchors, ignored by most drivers. \\
+backref & \textit{false} & do bibliographical back references \\
+baseurl & \textit{empty} & set base URL for document \\
+bookmarks & \textit{true} & make bookmarks \\
+bookmarksnumbered & \textit{false} & put section numbers in bookmarks \\
+bookmarksopen & \textit{false} & open up bookmark tree \\
+bookmarksopenlevel & \ttfamily\ci{maxdimen} & level to which bookmarks are open \\
+bookmarkstype & \textit{toc} & to specify which `toc' file to mimic \\
+breaklinks & \textit{false} & allow links to break over lines \\
+CJKbookmarks & \textit{false} & to produce CJK bookmarks\\
+citebordercolor & \textit{0 1 0} & color of border around cites \\
+citecolor & \textit{green} & color of citation links \\
+colorlinks & \textit{false} & color links \\
+ & \textit{true} & (\textsf{tex4ht}, \textsf{dviwindo}) \\
+debug & \textit{false} & provide details of anchors defined; same as verbose \\
+destlabel & \textit{false} & destinations are named by the first \verb|\label| after the anchor creation \\
+draft & \textit{false} & do not do any hyperlinking \\
+driverfallback & & default if no driver specified or detected\\
+dvipdfm & & use \textsf{dvipdfm} backend \\
+dvipdfmx & & use \textsf{dvipdfmx} backend \\
+dvips & & use \textsf{dvips} backend \\
+dvipsone & & use \textsf{dvipsone} backend \\
+dviwindo & & use \textsf{dviwindo} backend \\
+encap & & to set encap character for hyperindex \\
+extension & \textit{dvi} & suffix of linked files \\
+filebordercolor & \textit{0 .5 .5} & color of border around file links \\
+filecolor & \textit{cyan} & color of file links \\
+final & \textit{true} & opposite of option draft \\
+frenchlinks & \textit{false} & use small caps instead of color for links \\
+hidelinks & & Hide links (removing color and border) \\
+hyperfigures & \textit{false} & make figures hyper links \\
+hyperfootnotes & \textit{true} & set up hyperlinked footnotes \\
+hyperindex & \textit{true} & set up hyperlinked indices \\
+hypertex & & use \textsf{Hyper\TeX} backend \\
+hypertexnames & \textit{true} & use guessable names for links \\
+implicit & \textit{true} & redefine \LaTeX\ internals \\
+latex2html & & use \textsf{\LaTeX2HTML} backend \\
+linkbordercolor & \textit{1 0 0} & color of border around links \\
+linkcolor & \textit{red} & color of links \\
+linktoc & \textit{section} & make text be link on TOC, LOF and LOT \\
+linktocpage & \textit{false} & make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF and LOT \\
+menubordercolor & \textit{1 0 0} & color of border around menu links \\
+menucolor & \textit{red} & color for menu links \\
+nativepdf & \textit{false} & an alias for \textsf{dvips} \\
+naturalnames & \textit{false} & use \LaTeX-computed names for links \\
+nesting & \textit{false} & allow nesting of links \\
+pageanchor & \textit{true} & put an anchor on every page \\
+pagebackref & \textit{false} & backreference by page number \\
+pdfauthor & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Author field \\
+pdfborder & \textit{0 0 1} & width of PDF link border \\
+ & \textit{0 0 0} & (\texttt{colorlinks)} \\
+pdfborderstyle & & border style for links \\
+pdfcenterwindow & \textit{false} & position the document window in the center of the screen \\
+pdfcreator & \textit{LaTeX with} & text for PDF Creator field \\
+ & \textit{hyperref} & \\
+pdfdirection & \textit{empty} & direction setting \\
+pdfdisplaydoctitle & \textit{false} & display document title instead
+ of file name in title bar\\
+pdfduplex & \textit{empty} & paper handling option for
+ print dialog\\
+pdffitwindow & \textit{false} & resize document window to fit document size \\
+pdfhighlight & \textit{/I} & set highlighting of PDF links \\
+pdfinfo & \textit{empty} & alternative interface for setting document information\\
+pdfkeywords & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Keywords field \\
+pdflang & \textit{relax} & PDF language identifier (RFC 3066) \\
+pdfmark & \textit{false} & an alias for \textsf{dvips} \\
+pdfmenubar & \textit{true} & make PDF viewer's menu bar visible \\
+pdfnewwindow & \textit{false} & make links that open another PDF \\
+ & & file start a new window \\
+pdfnonfullscreenpagemode
+ & \textit{empty} & page mode setting on exiting
+ full-screen mode\\
+pdfnumcopies & \textit{empty} & number of printed copies\\
+pdfpagelabels & \textit{true} & set PDF page labels \\
+pdfpagelayout & \textit{empty} & set layout of PDF pages \\
+pdfpagemode & \textit{empty} & set default mode of PDF display \\
+pdfpagescrop & \textit{empty} & set crop size of PDF document \\
+pdfpagetransition & \textit{empty} & set PDF page transition style \\
+pdfpicktraybypdfsize
+ & \textit{empty} & set option for print dialog \\
+pdfprintarea & \textit{empty} & set /PrintArea of viewer preferences \\
+pdfprintclip & \textit{empty} & set /PrintClip of viewer preferences \\
+pdfprintpagerange & \textit{empty} & set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences \\
+pdfprintscaling & \textit{empty} & page scaling option for print dialog \\
+pdfproducer & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Producer field \\
+pdfremotestartview & \textit{Fit} & starting view of remote PDF documents \\
+pdfstartpage & \textit{1} & page at which PDF document opens \\
+pdfstartview & \textit{Fit} & starting view of PDF document \\
+pdfsubject & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Subject field \\
+pdftex & & use \textsf{pdf\TeX} backend \\
+pdftitle & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Title field \\
+pdftoolbar & \textit{true} & make PDF toolbar visible \\
+pdftrapped & \textit{empty} & Sets the document information Trapped entry.
+ Possible values are \texttt{True}, \texttt{False} and \texttt{Unknown}.
+ An empty value means, the entry is not set.\\
+pdfview & \textit{XYZ} & PDF `view' when on link traversal \\
+pdfviewarea & \textit{empty} & set /ViewArea of viewer preferences \\
+pdfviewclip & \textit{empty} & set /ViewClip of viewer preferences \\
+pdfwindowui & \textit{true} & make PDF user interface elements visible \\
+plainpages & \textit{false} & do page number anchors as plain Arabic \\
+ps2pdf & & use \textsf{ps2pdf} backend \\
+psdextra & \textit{false} & define more short names for PDF string commands \\
+raiselinks & \textit{false} & raise up links (for \textsf{Hyper\TeX} backend) \\
+runbordercolor & \textit{0 .7 .7} & color of border around `run' links \\
+runcolor & \textit{filecolor} & color of `run' links\\
+setpagesize & \textit{true} & set page size by special driver commands \\
+tex4ht & & use \textsf{\TeX4ht} backend \\
+textures & & use \textsf{Textures} backend \\
+unicode & \textit{false} & Unicode encoded pdf strings, by defaut true with \textsf{Xe\TeX} and \textsf{Lu\TeX} \\
+urlbordercolor & \textit{0 1 1} & color of border around URL links \\
+urlcolor & \textit{magenta} & color of URL links \\
+verbose & \textit{false} & be chatty \\
+vtex & & use \textsf{VTeX} backend\\
+xetex & & use \textsf{Xe\TeX} backend\\
+\end{longtable}
+
+\section{Additional user macros}
+
+If you need to make references to URLs, or write explicit links, the
+following low-level user macros are provided:
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{href}\verb|[|\emph{options}\verb|]|\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent The \emph{text} is made a hyperlink to the \emph{URL}; this
+must be a full URL (relative to the base URL, if that is defined). The
+special characters \# and \~{} do \emph{not} need to be escaped in any
+way (unless the command is used in the argument of another command).
+
+The optional argument \emph{options} recognizes the hyperref options
+\texttt{pdfremotestartview}, \texttt{pdfnewwindow} and the following
+key value options:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\texttt{page}:] Specifies the start page number of remote
+PDF documents. First page is \verb|1|.
+\item[\texttt{ismap}:] Boolean key, if set to \verb|true|, the
+URL should appended by the coordinates as query parameters by
+the PDF viewer.
+\item[\texttt{nextactionraw}:] The value of key \verb|/Next| of
+action dictionaries, see PDF specification.
+\end{description}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{url}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent Similar to
+\ci{href}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}{|\ci{nolinkurl}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}}|.
+Depending on the driver \verb|\href| also tries to detect the link type.
+Thus the result can be a url link, file link, \dots
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{nolinkurl}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent Write \emph{URL} in the same way as \verb|\url|,
+ without creating a hyperlink.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hyperbaseurl}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent A base \emph{URL} is established, which is prepended to other
+specified URLs, to make it easier to write portable documents.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hyperimage}\verb|{|\emph{imageURL}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent The link to the image referenced by the URL is inserted, using
+\emph{text} as the anchor.
+
+ For drivers that produce HTML, the image itself is inserted by the
+browser, with the \emph{text} being ignored completely.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hyperdef}\verb|{|\emph{category}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent A target area of the document (the \emph{text}) is marked, and
+given the name \emph{category.name}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hyperref}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}{|\emph{category}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent \emph{text} is made into a link to \emph{URL\#category.name}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hyperref}\verb|[|\emph{label}\verb|]{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent
+\emph{text} is made into a link to the same place as
+\verb|\ref{|\emph{label}\verb|}| would be linked.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hyperlink}\verb|{|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hypertarget}\verb|{|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent A simple internal link is created with \verb|\hypertarget|,
+with two parameters of an anchor \emph{name}, and anchor
+\emph{text}. \verb|\hyperlink| has two arguments, the name of a
+hypertext object defined somewhere by \verb|\hypertarget|, and the
+\emph{text} which be used as the link on the page.
+
+Note that in HTML parlance, the \verb|\hyperlink| command inserts a
+notional \# in front of each link, making it relative to the current
+testdocument; \verb|\href| expects a full URL.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{phantomsection}
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent
+This sets an anchor at this location. It works similar to
+\verb|\hypertarget{}{}| with an automatically chosen anchor name.
+Often it is used in conjunction
+with \verb|\addcontentsline| for sectionlike things (index, bibliography,
+preface). \verb|\addcontentsline| refers to the latest previous location
+where an anchor is set. Example:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cleardoublepage
+\phantomsection
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}
+\printindex
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the
+index points to the start of the index page, not to a location
+before this page.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{autoref}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent
+This is a replacement for the usual \verb|\ref| command that places a
+contextual label in front of the reference. This gives your users a
+bigger target to click for hyperlinks (e.g.\ `section 2' instead of
+merely the number `2').
+
+The label is worked out from the context of the original \verb|\label|
+command by \textsf{hyperref} by using the macros listed below (shown
+with their default values). The macros can be (re)defined in documents
+using \verb|\(re)newcommand|; note that some of these macros are already
+defined in the standard document classes. The mixture of lowercase and
+uppercase initial letters is deliberate and corresponds to the author's
+practice.
+
+For each macro below, \textsf{hyperref} checks \ci{*autorefname} before
+\ci{*name}. For instance, it looks for \ci{figureautorefname} before
+\ci{figurename}.
+
+\begin{longtable}{@{}lp{10cm}@{}}
+\textit{Macro} & \textit{Default} \\
+\ci{figurename} & Figure \\
+\ci{tablename} & Table \\
+\ci{partname} & Part \\
+\ci{appendixname} & Appendix \\
+\ci{equationname} & Equation \\
+\ci{Itemname} & item \\
+\ci{chaptername} & chapter \\
+\ci{sectionname} & section \\
+\ci{subsectionname} & subsection \\
+\ci{subsubsectionname} & subsubsection \\
+\ci{paragraphname} & paragraph \\
+\ci{Hfootnotename} & footnote \\
+\ci{AMSname} & Equation \\
+\ci{theoremname} & Theorem\\
+\ci{page} & page\\
+\end{longtable}
+
+Example for a redefinition if \textsf{babel} is used:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
+\addto\extrasngerman{%
+ \def\subsectionautorefname{Unterkapitel}%
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+Hint: \cs{autoref} works via the counter name that the reference
+is based on. Sometimes \cs{autoref} chooses the wrong name, if
+the counter is used for different things. For example, it happens
+with \cs{newtheorem} if a lemma shares a counter with theorems.
+Then package \xpackage{aliascnt} provides a method to generate a
+simulated second counter that allows the differentiation between
+theorems and lemmas:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\usepackage{aliascnt}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+
+\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}
+
+\newaliascnt{lemma}{theorem}
+\newtheorem{lemma}[lemma]{Lemma}
+\aliascntresetthe{lemma}
+
+\providecommand*{\lemmaautorefname}{Lemma}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+We will use \autoref{a} to prove \autoref{b}.
+
+\begin{lemma}\label{a}
+ Nobody knows.
+\end{lemma}
+
+\begin{theorem}\label{b}
+ Nobody is right.
+\end{theorem}.
+
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{autopageref}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent
+It replaces \verb|\pageref| and adds the name for page in front of
+the page reference. First \ci{pageautorefname} is checked before
+\ci{pagename}.
+
+For instances where you want a reference to use the correct counter, but
+not to create a link, there are starred forms (these starred forms exist even if
+hyperref has been loaded with \verb|implicit=false|):
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{ref*}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{pageref*}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{autoref*}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{autopageref*}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+A typical use would be to write
+\begin{verbatim}
+\hyperref[other]{that nice section (\ref*{other}) we read before}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+We want \verb|\ref*{other}| to generate the correct number, but not to
+form a link, since we do this ourselves with \ci{hyperref}.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{pdfstringdef}\verb|{|\emph{macroname}\verb|}{|\emph{\TeX string}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\ci{pdfstringdef} returns a macro containing the PDF string. (Currently
+this is done globally, but do not rely on it.) All the following tasks,
+definitions and redefinitions are made in a group to keep them local:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Switching to PD1 or PU encoding
+\item Defining the \Quote{octal sequence commands} (\verb|\345|): \verb|\edef\3{\string\3}|
+\item Special glyphs of \TeX: \verb|\{|, \verb|\%|, \verb|\&|, \verb|\space|, \verb|\dots|, etc.
+\item National glyphs (\textsf{german.sty}, \textsf{french.sty}, etc.)
+\item Logos: \verb|\TeX|, \verb|\eTeX|, \verb|\MF|, etc.
+\item Disabling commands that do not provide useful functionality in bookmarks:
+\verb|\label|, \verb|\index|, \verb|\glossary|, \verb|\discretionary|, \verb|\def|, \verb|\let|, etc.
+\item \LaTeX's font commands like \verb|\textbf|, etc.
+\item Support for \verb|\xspace| provided by the \xpackage{xspace} package
+\end{itemize}
+
+In addition, parentheses are protected to avoid the danger of unsafe
+unbalanced parentheses in the PDF string. For further details, see Heiko
+Oberdiek's Euro\TeX\ paper distributed with \textsf{hyperref}.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{begin}\verb|{NoHyper}|\ldots\ci{end}\verb|{NoHyper}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+ Sometimes we just don't want the wretched package interfering
+ with us. Define an environment we can put in manually, or include
+ in a style file, which stops the hypertext functions doing anything.
+ This is used, for instance, in the Elsevier classes, to stop
+ \verb|hyperref| playing havoc in the front matter.
+
+\subsection{Bookmark macros}
+
+\subsubsection{Setting bookmarks}
+
+Usually \textsf{hyperref} automatically adds bookmarks for
+\verb|\section| and similar macros. But they can also set manually.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{pdfbookmark}\verb|[|\emph{level}\verb|]{|text\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+creates a bookmark with the specified text and at the given level (default is
+0). As name for the internal anchor name is used (in conjunction with
+level). Therefore the name must be unique (similar to \verb|\label|).
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{currentpdfbookmark}\verb|{|\emph{text}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+creates a bookmark at the current level.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{subpdfbookmark}\verb|{|\emph{text}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+creates a bookmark one step down in the bookmark hierarchy.
+Internally the current level is increased by one.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{belowpdfbookmark}\verb|{|\emph{text}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+creates a bookmark below the current bookmark level. However after the
+command the current bookmark level has not changed.
+
+\noindent \textbf{Hint:} Package \textsf{bookmark} replaces
+\textsf{hyperref}'s bookmark organization by a new algorithm:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Usually only one \LaTeX\ run is needed.
+\item More control over the bookmark appearance (color, font).
+\item Different bookmark actions are supported (external file links,
+ URLs, \dots).
+\end{itemize}
+Therefore I recommend using this package.
+
+\subsubsection{Replacement macros}
+
+\textsf{hyperref} takes the text for bookmarks from the arguments of
+commands like \ci{section}, which can contain things like math, colors,
+or font changes, none of which will display in bookmarks as is.
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{texorpdfstring}\verb|{|\emph{\TeX string}\verb|}{|\emph{PDFstring}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{Pythagoras:
+ \texorpdfstring{$ a^2 + b^2 = c^2 $}{%
+ a\texttwosuperior\ + b\texttwosuperior\ =
+ c\texttwosuperior
+ }%
+}
+\section{\texorpdfstring{\textcolor{red}}{}{Red} Mars}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\ci{pdfstringdef} executes the hook \pdfstringdefPreHook before it
+expands the string. Therefore, you can use this hook to perform
+additional tasks or to disable additional commands.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\expandafter\def\expandafter\pdfstringdefPreHook
+\expandafter{%
+ \pdfstringdefPreHook
+ \renewcommand{\mycommand}[1]{}%
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+However, for disabling commands, an easier way is via
+\ci{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}, which adds its argument to the
+definition of \ci{pdfstringdefPreHook} (`@' can here be used as letter in
+command names):
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{%
+ \let~\textasciitilde
+ \def\url{\pdfstringdefWarn\url}%
+ \let\textcolor\@gobble
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Utility macros}
+
+\label{hypercalcbp}
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{hypercalcbp}\verb|{|\emph{dimen specification}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+\noindent
+\verb|\hypercalcbp| takes a \TeX\ dimen specification and
+converts it to bp and returns the number without the unit.
+This is useful for options \verb|pdfview|, \verb|pdfstartview|
+and \verb|pdfremotestartview|.
+Example:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\hypersetup{
+ pdfstartview={FitBH \hypercalcbp{\paperheight-\topmargin-1in
+ -\headheight-\headsep}
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+The origin of the PDF coordinate system is the lower left corner.
+
+Note, for calculations you need either package \xpackage{calc} or
+\hologo{eTeX}. Nowadays the latter should automatically be enabled
+for \hologo{LaTeX} formats. Users without \hologo{eTeX}, please, look
+in the source documentation \verb|hyperref.dtx| for further
+limitations.
+
+Also \cs{hypercalcbp} cannot be used in option specifications
+of \cs{documentclass} and \cs{usepackage}, because
+\hologo{LaTeX} expands the option lists of these commands. However
+package \xpackage{hyperref} is not yet loaded and an undefined control
+sequence error would arise.
+
+\section[New Features]{New Features%
+\footnote{This section moved from the README file, needs more integration into the manual}}
+
+
+\subsection{Option `pdflinkmargin'}
+
+ Option `pdflinkmargin' is an experimental option for specifying
+ a link margin, if the driver supports this. Default is 1 pt for
+ supporting drivers.
+
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[pdfTeX]
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item The link area also depends on the surrounding box.
+ \item Settings have local effect.
+ \item When a page is shipped out, pdfTeX uses the current setting
+ of the link margin for all links on the page.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\item[pdfmark]
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Settings have global effect.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\item[xetex]
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Settings must be done in the preamble or the first page and then have global effect.
+ The key inserts the new (x)dvipdfmx special \verb|\special{dvipdfmx:config g #1}| (with the unit removed).
+\end{itemize}
+
+\item[Other drivers]
+ Unsupported.
+\end{description}
+
+
+\subsection{Field option `calculatesortkey'}
+
+ Fields with calculated values are calculated in document order
+ by default. If calculated field values depend on other calculated
+ fields that appear later in the document, then the correct calculation
+ order can be specified with option `calculatesortkey'. Its value is
+ used as key to lexicographically sort the calculated fields.
+ The sort key do not need to be unique. Fields that share the same
+ key are sorted in document order.
+
+
+
+ Currently the field option `calculatesortkey' is only supported by
+ the driver for pdfTeX.
+
+
+\subsection{Option `localanchorname'}
+
+ When an anchor is set (e.g. via \verb|\refstepcounter|, then the
+ anchor name is globally set to the current anchor name.
+
+
+ For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \section{Foobar}
+ \begin{equation}\end{equation}
+ \label{sec:foobar}
+\end{verbatim}
+ With the default global setting (localanchorname=false)
+ a reference to `sec:foobar' jumps to the equation before.
+ With option `localanchorname' the anchor of the equation
+ is forgotten after the environment and the reference
+ `sec:foobar' jumps to the section title.
+
+
+ Option `localanchorname' is an experimental option, there
+ might be situations, where the anchor name is not available
+ as expected.
+
+
+\subsection{Option `customdriver'}
+
+ The value of option `customdriver' is the name of an external
+ driver file without extension `.def'. The file must have
+ \verb|\ProvidesFile| with a version date and number that match the
+ date and number of `hyperref', otherwise a warning is given.
+
+ Because the interface, what needs to be defined in the driver,
+ is not well defined and quite messy, the option is mainly intended
+ to ease developing, testing, debugging the driver part.
+
+
+\subsection{Option `psdextra'}
+
+ LaTeX's NFSS is used to assist the conversion of arbitrary
+ TeX strings to PDF strings (bookmarks, PDF information entries).
+ Many math command names (\verb|\geq|, \verb|\notin|, ...) are not in control
+ of NFSS, therefore they are defined with prefix `text'
+ (\verb|\textgeq|, \verb|\textnotin|, ...). They can be mapped to short names
+ during the processing to PDF strings. The disadvantage is that
+ they are many hundreds macros that need to be redefined for
+ each PDF string conversion. Therefore this can be enabled or
+ disabled as option `psdextra'. On default the option is turned
+ off (set to `false'). Turning the option on means
+ that the short names are available. Then \verb|\geq| can directly
+ be used instead of \verb|\textgeq|.
+
+
+\subsection{\textbackslash XeTeXLinkBox}
+
+ When XeTeX generates a link annotation, it does not look
+ at the boxes (as the other drivers), but only at the character
+ glyphs. If there are no glyphs (images, rules, ...), then
+ it does not generate a link annotation. Macro \verb|\XeTeXLinkBox|
+ puts its argument in a box and adds spaces at the lower left
+ and upper right corners. An additional margin can be specified
+ by setting it to the dimen register \verb|\XeTeXLinkMargin|. The default
+ is 2pt.
+
+ Example:
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ % xelatex
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \setlength{\XeTeXLinkMargin}{1pt}
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{Hello World}
+ \newpage
+ \label{sec:hello}
+ \hyperref[sec:hello]{%
+ \XeTeXLinkBox{\rule{10mm}{10mm}}%
+ }
+ \end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{\textbackslash IfHyperBooleanExists and \textbackslash IfHyperBoolean}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \IfHyperBooleanExists{OPTION}{YES}{NO}
+\end{verbatim}
+ If a hyperref OPTION is a boolean, that means it takes values
+ `true' or `false', then \verb|\IfHyperBooleanExists| calls YES, otherwise NO.
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \IfHyperBoolean{OPTION}{YES}{NO}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Macro \verb|\IfHyperBoolean| calls YES, if OPTION exists as boolean and is
+ enabled. Otherwise NO is executed.
+
+
+
+ Both macros are expandable. Additionally option `stoppedearly' is
+ available. It is enabled if \verb|\MaybeStopEarly| or \verb|\MaybeStopNow|
+ end hyperref prematurely.
+
+
+\subsection{\textbackslash unichar}
+
+ If a Unicode character is not supported by puenc.def, it can
+ be given by using \verb|\unichar|. Its name and syntax is inherited
+ from package `ucs'. However it is defined independently for
+ use in hyperref's \verb|\pdfstringdef| (that converts arbitrary
+ TeX code to PDF strings or tries to do this).
+
+
+
+ Macro \verb|\unichar| takes a TeX number as argument,
+ examples for U+263A (WHITE SMILING FACE):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \unichar{"263A}% hexadecimal notation
+ \unichar{9786}% decimal notation
+\end{verbatim}
+ `"' must not be a babel shorthand character or otherwise
+ active. Otherwise prefix it with \verb|\string|:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \unichar{\string"263A}% converts `"' to `"' with catcode 12 (other)
+\end{verbatim}
+ Users of (n)german packages or babel options may use \verb|\dq| instead:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \unichar{\dq 263A}% \dq is double quote with catcode 12 (other)
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{\textbackslash ifpdfstringunicode}
+
+ Some features of the PDF specification needs PDF strings.
+ Examples are bookmarks or the entries in the information dictionary.
+ The PDF specification allows two encodings `PDFDocEncoding'
+ (8-bit encoding) and `Unicode' (UTF-16). The user can help
+ using \verb|\texorpdfstring| to replace complicate TeX constructs
+ by a representation for the PDF string. However \verb|\texorpdfstring|
+ does not distinguish the two encodings. This gap closes
+ \verb|\ifpdfstringunicode|. It is only allowed in the second argument
+ of \verb|\texorpdfstring| and takes two arguments, the first allows
+ the full range of Unicode. The second is limited to the
+ characters available in PDFDocEncoding.
+
+
+
+ As example we take a macro definition for the Vietnamese
+ name of Han The Thanh. Correctly written it needs some
+ accented characters, one character even with a double accent.
+ Class `tugboat.cls' defines a macro for the typesetted name:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \def\Thanh{%
+ H\`an~%
+ Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}}%
+ ~Th\`anh%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+ It's not entirely correct, the second accent over the `e' is not
+ an acute, but a hook. However standard LaTeX does not provide
+ such an accent.
+
+ Now we can extend the definition to support hyperref.
+ The first and the last word are already supported automatically.
+ Characters with two or more accents are a difficult business in
+ LaTeX, because the NFSS2 macros of the LaTeX kernel do not support
+ more than one accent. Therefore also puenc.def misses support for
+ them. But we can provide it using \verb|\unichar|. The character
+ in question is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ % U+1EC3 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX AND HOOK ABOVE
+\end{verbatim}
+ Thus we can put this together:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \def\Thanh{%
+ H\`an~%
+ \texorpdfstring{Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}}}%
+ {\ifpdfstringunicode{Th\unichar{"1EC3}}{Th\^e}}%
+ ~Th\`anh%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+ For PDFDocEncoding (PD1) the variant above has dropped the
+ second accent. Alternatively we could provide a representation
+ without accents instead of wrong accents:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \def\Thanh{%
+ \texorpdfstring{%
+ H\`an~%
+ Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}}}%
+ ~Th\`anh%
+ }{%
+ \ifpdfstringunicode{%
+ H\`an Th\unichar{"1EC3} Th\`anh%
+ }{%
+ Han The Thanh%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Customizing index style file with \textbackslash nohyperpage}
+
+ Since version 2008/08/14~v6.78f.
+
+
+
+ For hyperlink support in the index, hyperref inserts \verb|\hyperpage|
+ into the index macros. After processing with Makeindex, \verb|\hyperpage|
+ analyzes its argument to detect page ranges and page comma lists.
+ However, only the standard settings are supported directly:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ delim_r "--"
+ delim_n ", "
+\end{verbatim}
+ (See manual page/documentation of Makeindex that explains
+ the keys that can be used in style files for Makeindex.)
+ Customized versions of
+ \verb|delim_r, delim_n, suffix_2p, suffix_3p, suffix_mp|
+ needs markup that \verb|\hyperpage| can detect and knows that
+ this stuff does not belong to a page number. Makro
+ \verb|\nohyperpage| serves as this markup. Put the customized
+ code for these keys inside \verb|\nohyperpage|, e.g.:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ suffix_2p "\\nohyperpage{f.}"
+ suffix_3p "\\nohyperpage{ff.}"
+\end{verbatim}
+ (Depending on the typesetting tradition some space ``\verb|\\|,'' or ``\verb|~|''
+ should be put before the first f inside \verb|\nohyperpage|.)
+
+
+\subsection{Experimental option `ocgcolorlinks'}
+
+ The idea are colored links, when viewed, but printed without colors.
+ This new experimental option `ocgcolorlinks' uses Optional Content
+ Groups, a feature introduced in PDF 1.5.
+
+ A better implementation which hasn't the disadvantage to prevent line breaks is
+ in the ocgx2 package. Check its documentation for details how to use it.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item The option must be given for package loading:
+ \verb|\usepackage[ocgcolorlinks]{hyperref}|
+ \item Main disadvantage: Links cannot be broken across lines.
+ PDF reference 1.7: 4.10.2 ``Making Graphical Content Optional'':
+ Graphics state operations, such as setting the color, ...,
+ are still applied.
+ Therefore the link text is put in a box and set twice, with and
+ without color.
+ \item The feature can be switched of by \verb|\hypersetup{ocgcolorlinks=false}|
+ inside the document.
+ \item Supported drivers: pdftex, dvipdfm
+ \item The PDF version should be at least 1.5. It is automatically
+ set for pdfTeX, LuaTeX and dvipdfmx.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Option `pdfa'}
+
+ The new option `pdfa' tries to avoid violations of PDF/A in code
+ generated by hyperref. However, the result is usually not in PDF/A,
+ because many features aren't controlled by hyperref (XMP metadata,
+ fonts, colors, driver dependend low level stuff, ...).
+
+
+
+ Currently, option `pdfa' sets and disables the following items:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Enabled annotation flags: Print, NoZoom, NoRotate [PDF/A 6.5.3].
+ \item Disabled annotation flags: Hidden, Invisible, NoView [PDF/A 6.5.3].
+ \item Disabled: Launch action (\href{run:...} [PDF/A 6.6.1].
+ \item Restricted: Named actions (\Acrobatmenu: NextPage, PrevPage,
+ FirstPage, LastPage) [PDF/A 6.6.1].
+ \item Many things are disabled in PDF formulars:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item JavaScript actions [PDF/A 6.6.1]
+ \item Trigger events (additional actions) [PDF/A 6.6.2]
+ \item Push button (because of JavaScript)
+ \item Interactive Forms: Flag NeedAppearances is the default `false'
+ (Because of this, hyperref's implementation of Forms looks ugly).
+ [PDF/A 6.9]
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+
+ The default value of the new option `pdfa' is `false'. It influences
+ the loading of the package and cannot be changed after hyperref is
+ loaded (\verb|\usepackage{hyperref}|).
+
+
+
+\subsection{Option `linktoc' added}
+
+ The new option `linktoc' allows more control which part
+ of an entry in the table of contents is made into a link:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item `linktoc=none' (no links)
+ \item `linktoc=section' (default behaviour, same as `linktocpage=false')
+ \item `linktoc=page' (same as `linktocpage=true')
+ \item `linktoc=all' (both the section and page part are links)
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Option `pdfnewwindow' changed}
+
+ Before 6.77b:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item pdfnewwindow=true $\rightarrow$ /NewWindow true
+ \item pdfnewwindow=false $\rightarrow$ (absent)
+ \item unused pdfnewwindow $\rightarrow$ (absent)
+\end{itemize}
+ Since 6.77b:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item pdfnewwindow=true $\rightarrow$ /NewWindow true
+ \item pdfnewwindow=false $\rightarrow$ /NewWindow false
+ \item pdfnewwindow={} $\rightarrow$ (absent)
+ \item unused pdfnewwindow $\rightarrow$ (absent)
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+
+ Rationale: There is a difference between setting to `false'
+ and an absent entry. In the former case the new document
+ replaces the old one, in the latter case the PDF viewer
+ application should respect the user preference.
+
+
+\subsection{Flag options for PDF forms}
+
+ PDF form field macros (\verb|\TextField|, \verb|\CheckBox|, ...) support
+ boolean flag options. The option name is the lowercase
+ version of the names in the PDF specification (1.7):
+
+ \url{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/pdf/pdf_reference.html}
+
+ \url{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/pdfs/pdf_reference.pdf}
+
+ Options (convert to lowercase) except flags in square brackets:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Table 8.16 Annotation flags (page 608):
+
+{\obeylines
+ 1 Invisible
+ 2 Hidden (PDF 1.2)
+ 3 Print (PDF 1.2)
+ 4 NoZoom (PDF 1.3)
+ 5 NoRotate (PDF 1.3)
+ 6 NoView (PDF 1.3)
+ [7 ReadOnly (PDF 1.3)] ignored for widget annotations, see table 8.70
+ 8 Locked (PDF 1.4)
+ 9 ToggleNoView (PDF 1.5)
+ 10 LockedContents (PDF 1.7)
+}
+ \item Table 8.70 Field flags common to all field types (page 676):
+
+{\obeylines
+ 1 ReadOnly
+ 2 Required
+ 3 NoExport
+}
+ \item Table 8.75 Field flags specific to button fields (page 686):
+
+{\obeylines
+ 15 NoToggleToOff (Radio buttons only)
+ 16 Radio (set: radio buttons, clear: check box, pushbutton: clear)
+ 17 Pushbutton
+ 26 RadiosInUniso (PDF 1.5)
+}
+ \item Table 8.77 Field flags specific to text fields (page 691):
+
+{\obeylines
+ 13 Multiline
+ 14 Password
+ 21 FileSelect (PDF 1.4)
+ 23 DoNotSpellCheck (PDF 1.4)
+ 24 DoNotScroll (PDF 1.4)
+ 25 Comb (PDF 1.5)
+ 26 RichText (PDF 1.5)
+}
+ \item Table 8.79 Field flags specific to choice fields (page 693):
+
+{\obeylines
+ 18 Combo (set: combo box, clear: list box)
+ 19 Edit (only useful if Combo is set)
+ 20 (Sort) for authoring tools, not PDF viewers
+ 22 MultiSelect (PDF 1.4)
+ 23 DoNotSpellCheck (PDF 1.4) (only useful if Combo and Edit are set)
+ 27 CommitOnSelChange (PDF 1.5)
+}
+ \item Table 8.86 Flags for submit-form actions (page 704):
+
+{\obeylines
+ [1 Include/Exclude] unsupported, use `noexport' (table 8.70) instead
+ 2 IncludeNoValueFields
+ [3 ExportFormat] handled by option `export'
+ 4 GetMethod
+ 5 SubmitCoordinates
+ [6 XFDF (PDF 1.4)] handled by option `export'
+ 7 IncludeAppendSaves (PDF 1.4)
+ 8 IncludeAnnotations (PDF 1.4)
+ [9 SubmitPDF (PDF 1.4)] handled by option `export'
+ 10 CanonicalFormat (PDF 1.4)
+ 11 ExclNonUserAnnots (PDF 1.4)
+ 12 ExclFKey (PDF 1.4)
+ 14 EmbedForm (PDF 1.5)
+}
+\end{itemize}
+
+ New option `export' sets the export format of a submit action.
+ Valid values are (upper- or lowercase):
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item FDF
+ \item HTML
+ \item XFDF
+ \item PDF (not supported by Acrobat Reader)
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Option `pdfversion'}
+
+ This is an experimental option. It notifies `hyperref' about
+ the intended PDF version. Currently this is used in code for
+ PDF forms (implementation notes 116 and 122 of PDF spec 1.7).
+
+
+
+ Values: 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7. Values below 1.2 are not
+ supported, because most drivers expect higher PDF versions.
+
+
+
+ The option must be used early, not after \verb|\usepackage{hyperref}|.
+
+
+ In theory this option should also set the PDF version,
+ but this is not generally supported.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item pdfTeX below 1.10a: unsupported.
+ pdfTeX $\ge$ 1.10a and < 1.30: \verb|\pdfoptionpdfminorversion|
+ pdfTeX $\ge$ 1.30: \verb|\pdfminorversion|
+ \item dvipdfm: configuration file, example:
+ TeX Live 2007, texmf/dvipdfm/config/config, entry `V 2'.
+ \item dvipdfmx: configuration file, example:
+ TeX Live 2007, texmf/dvipdfm/dvipdfmx.cfg, entry `V 4'.
+ \item Ghostscript: option -dCompatibilityLevel (this is set in
+ `ps2pdf12', `ps2pdf13', `ps2pdf14').
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+ The current PDF version is used as default if this version
+ can be detected (only pdfTeX $\ge$ 1.10a). Otherwise the lowest
+ version 1.2 is assumed. Thus `hyperref' tries to avoid PDF code
+ that breaks this version, but is free to use ignorable higher PDF
+ features.
+
+
+\subsection{Field option `name'}
+
+ Many form objects uses the label argument
+ for several purposes:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Layouted label.
+ \item As name in HTML structures.
+\end{itemize}
+ Code that is suitable for layouting with TeX can
+ break in the structures of the output format.
+ If option `name' is given, then its value is used
+ as name in the different output structures. Thus
+ the value should consist of letters only.
+
+
+\subsection{Option `pdfencoding'}
+
+ The PDF format allows two encodings for bookmarks and entries
+ in the information dictionary: PDFDocEncoding and Unicode
+ as UTF-16BE. Option \xoption{pdfencoding} selects between these encodings:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \xoption{pdfdoc} uses PDFDocEncoding. It uses just one byte per character,
+ but the supported characters are limited (244 in PDF-1.7).
+ \item \xoption{unicode} sets Unicode. It is encoded as UTF-16BE. Two bytes
+ are used for most characters, surrogates need four bytes.
+ \item \xoption{auto} PDFDocEncoding if the string does not contain characters
+ outside the encoding and Unicode otherwise.
+\end{itemize}
+
+ The luatex driver uses \xoption{unicode} by default. If another encoding should be forced,
+ it should be done in \verb|hypersetup|.
+
+\subsection{Color options/package hycolor}
+
+ See documentation of package `hycolor'.
+
+
+\subsection{Option pdfusetitle}
+
+ If option pdfusetitle is set then hyperref tries to
+ derive the values for pdftitle and pdfauthor from
+ \verb|\title| and \verb|\author|. An optional argument for \verb|\title| and
+ \verb|\author| is supported (class amsart).
+
+
+\subsection{Starred form of \textbackslash autoref}
+
+ \verb|\autoref*| generates a reference without link as \verb|\ref*| or \verb|\pageref*|.
+
+
+\subsection{Link border style}
+
+ Links can be underlined instead of the default rectangle or
+ options \xoption{colorlinks}, \xoption{frenchlinks}. This is done by option
+ \verb|pdfborderstyle={/S/U/W 1}|
+
+ Some remarks:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item AR7/Linux seems to have a bug, that don't use the default
+ value \verb"1" for the width, but zero, thus that the underline
+ is not visible without \verb"/W 1". The same applies for
+ dashed boxes, eg.:
+ pdfborderstyle={/S/D/D[3 2]/W 1}
+
+ \item The syntax is described in the PDF specification, look for
+ ``border style'', eg.
+ Table 8.13 ``Entries in a border style dictionary''
+ (specification for version 1.6)
+
+ \item The border style is removed by
+ pdfborderstyle={}
+ This is automatically done if option colorlinks is enabled.
+
+ \item Be aware that not all PDF viewers support this feature, not
+ even Acrobat Reader itself:
+
+ Some support:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item AR7/Linux: \xoption{underline} and \xoption{dashed}, but the border width
+ must be given.
+ \item xpdf 3.00: \xoption{underline} and \xoption{dashed}
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ Unsupported:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item AR5/Linux
+ \item ghostscript 8.50
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Option \xoption{bookmarksdepth}}
+
+ The depth of the bookmarks can be controlled by the new
+ option \xoption{bookmarksdepth}. The option acts globally and
+ distinguishes three cases:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \xoption{bookmarksdepth} without value
+ Then hyperref uses the current value of counter \xoption{tocdepth}.
+ This is the compatible behaviour and the default.
+ \item \verb"bookmarksdepth=<number>", the value is number (also negative):
+ The depth for the bookmarks are set to this number.
+ \item \verb"bookmarksdepth=<name>"
+ The <name> is a document division name (part, chapter, ...).
+ It must not start with a digit or minus to avoid mixing up
+ with the number case. Internally hyperref uses the value
+ of macro \verb|\toclevel@<name>|.
+ Examples:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \hypersetup{bookmarksdepth=paragraph}
+ \hypersetup{bookmarksdepth=4} % same as before
+ \hypersetup{bookmarksdepth} % counter "tocdepth" is used
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Option \xoption{pdfescapeform}}
+
+ There are many places where arbitrary strings end up as
+ PS or PDF strings. The PS/PDF strings in parentheses form
+ require the protection of some characters, e.g. unmatched
+ left or right parentheses need escaping or the escape
+ character itself (backslash).
+ Since 2006/02/12~v6.75a the PS/PDF driver should do
+ this automatically. However I assume a problem with
+ compatibility, especially regarding the form part where
+ larger amounts of JavaScript code can be present.
+ It would be a pain to remove all the escaping, because
+ an additional escaping layer can falsify the code.
+
+ Therefore a new option pdfescapeform was introduced:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item pdfescapeform=false
+ Escaping for the formulars are disabled, this is
+ the compatibility behaviour, therefore this is the default.
+ \item pdfescapeform=true
+ Then the PS/PDF drivers do all the necessary escaping.
+ This is the logical choice and the recommended setting.
+ For example, the user writes JavaScript as JavaScript
+ and do not care about escaping characters for PS/PDF
+ output.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Default driver setting}
+
+ (hyperref $\ge$ 6.72s)
+ If no driver is given, hyperref tries its best to guess the
+ most suitable driver. Thus it loads \xoption{hpdftex}, if pdfTeX is
+ detected running in PDF mode. Or it loads the corresponding
+ VTeX driver for VTeX's working modes.
+ Unhappily many driver programs run after the TeX compiler,
+ so hyperref does not have a chance (dvips, dvipdfm, ...).
+ In this case driver \xoption{hypertex} is loaded that supports the
+ HyperTeX features that are recognized by xdvi for example.
+ This behaviour, however, can easily be changed in the configuration
+ file \verb"hyperref.cfg":
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hdvips}
+\end{verbatim}
+ for dvips, or
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hypertex}
+\end{verbatim}
+ for the default behaviour of hyperref.
+
+ See also the new option `driverfallback'.
+
+\subsection{Backref entries}
+
+ Alternative interface for formatting of backref entries, example:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[12pt,UKenglish]{article}
+
+\usepackage{babel}
+\usepackage[pagebackref]{hyperref}
+
+% Some language options are detected by package backref.
+% This affects the following macros:
+% \backrefpagesname
+% \backrefsectionsname
+% \backrefsep
+% \backreftwosep
+% \backreflastsep
+
+\renewcommand*{\backref}[1]{
+ % default interface
+ % #1: backref list
+ %
+ % We want to use the alternative interface,
+ % therefore the definition is empty here.
+}
+\renewcommand*{\backrefalt}[4]{%
+ % alternative interface
+ % #1: number of distinct back references
+ % #2: backref list with distinct entries
+ % #3: number of back references including duplicates
+ % #4: backref list including duplicates
+ \par
+ #3 citation(s) on #1 page(s): #2,\par
+ \ifnum#1=1 %
+ \ifnum#3=1 %
+ 1 citation on page %
+ \else
+ #3 citations on page %
+ \fi
+ \else
+ #3 citations on #1 pages %
+ \fi
+ #2,\par
+ \ifnum#3=1 %
+ 1 citation located at page %
+ \else
+ #3 citations located at pages %
+ \fi
+ #4.\par
+}
+
+% The list of distinct entries can be further refined:
+\renewcommand*{\backrefentrycount}[2]{%
+ % #1: the original backref entry
+ % #2: the count of citations of this entry,
+ % in case of duplicates greater than one
+ #1%
+ \ifnum#2>1 %
+ ~(#2)%
+ \fi
+}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+ \section{Hello}
+ \cite{ref1, ref2, ref3, ref4}
+ \section{World}
+ \cite{ref1, ref3}
+ \newpage
+
+ \section{Next section}
+ \cite{ref1}
+ \newpage
+
+ \section{Last section}
+ \cite{ref1, ref2}
+ \newpage
+
+ \pdfbookmark[1]{Bibliography}{bib}
+ \begin{thebibliography}{99}
+ \bibitem{ref1} Dummy entry one.
+
+ \bibitem{ref2} Dummy entry two.
+
+ \bibitem{ref3} Dummy entry three.
+
+ \bibitem{ref4} Dummy entry four.
+
+ \end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{\textbackslash phantomsection}
+
+Set an anchor at this location. It is often used in conjunction
+with \verb|\addcontentsline| for sectionlike things (index, bibliography,
+preface). \verb|\addcontentsline| refers to the latest previous location
+where an anchor is set.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \phantomsection
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}
+ \printindex
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the
+index points to the start of the index page, not to a location
+before this page.
+
+
+
+\section{Acrobat-specific behavior}
+If you want to access the menu options of Acrobat Reader or Exchange, the following
+macro is provided in the appropriate drivers:
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{Acrobatmenu}\verb|{|\emph{menuoption}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\noindent The \emph{text} is used to create a button which activates the appropriate \emph{menuoption}. The following table lists the option names you can use---comparison of this with the menus in Acrobat Reader or Exchange will show what they do. Obviously some are only appropriate to Exchange.
+
+\medskip
+\begin{longtable}{@{}l>{\raggedright\arraybackslash}p{9cm}@{}}
+File & Open, Close, Scan, Save, SaveAs, Optimizer:SaveAsOpt, Print, PageSetup, Quit \\
+File$\rightarrow$Import & ImportImage, ImportNotes, AcroForm:ImportFDF \\
+File$\rightarrow$Export & ExportNotes, AcroForm:ExportFDF \\
+File$\rightarrow$DocumentInfo & GeneralInfo, OpenInfo, FontsInfo, SecurityInfo, Weblink:Base, AutoIndex:DocInfo \\
+File$\rightarrow$Preferences & GeneralPrefs, NotePrefs, FullScreenPrefs, Weblink:Prefs, AcroSearch:Preferences(Windows)
+ or, AcroSearch:Prefs(Mac), Cpt:Capture \\
+Edit & Undo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear, SelectAll, Ole:CopyFile, TouchUp:TextAttributes,
+ TouchUp:FitTextToSelection, TouchUp:ShowLineMarkers, TouchUp:ShowCaptureSuspects,
+ TouchUp:FindSuspect, \\
+ & Properties \\
+Edit$\rightarrow$Fields & AcroForm:Duplicate, AcroForm:TabOrder \\
+Document & Cpt:CapturePages, AcroForm:Actions, CropPages, RotatePages, InsertPages, ExtractPages,
+ ReplacePages, DeletePages, NewBookmark, SetBookmarkDest, CreateAllThumbs,
+ DeleteAllThumbs \\
+View & ActualSize, FitVisible, FitWidth, FitPage, ZoomTo, FullScreen, FirstPage, PrevPage,
+ NextPage, LastPage, GoToPage, GoBack, GoForward, SinglePage, OneColumn, TwoColumns,
+ ArticleThreads, PageOnly, ShowBookmarks, ShowThumbs \\
+Tools & Hand, ZoomIn, ZoomOut, SelectText, SelectGraphics, Note, Link, Thread, AcroForm:Tool,
+ Acro\_Movie:MoviePlayer, TouchUp:TextTool, Find, FindAgain, FindNextNote,
+ CreateNotesFile \\
+Tools$\rightarrow$Search & AcroSrch:Query, AcroSrch:Indexes, AcroSrch:Results, AcroSrch:Assist, AcroSrch:PrevDoc,
+ AcroSrch:PrevHit, AcroSrch:NextHit, AcroSrch:NextDoc \\
+Window & ShowHideToolBar, ShowHideMenuBar, ShowHideClipboard, Cascade, TileHorizontal,
+ TileVertical, CloseAll \\
+Help & HelpUserGuide, HelpTutorial, HelpExchange, HelpScan, HelpCapture, HelpPDFWriter,
+ HelpDistiller, HelpSearch, HelpCatalog, HelpReader, Weblink:Home \\
+Help(Windows) & About
+\end{longtable}
+
+\section{PDF and HTML forms}
+You must put your fields inside a \texttt{Form} environment (only one per file).
+
+There are six macros to prepare fields:
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{TextField}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{CheckBox}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{ChoiceMenu}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}{|\emph{choices}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{PushButton}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{Submit}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{Reset}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+The way forms and their labels are laid out is determined by:
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{LayoutTextField}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}{|\emph{field}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{LayoutChoiceField}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}{|\emph{field}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{LayoutCheckField}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}{|\emph{field}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+These macros default to \#1 \#2
+
+What is actually shown in as the field is determined by:
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{MakeRadioField}\verb|{|\emph{width}\verb|}{|\emph{height}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{MakeCheckField}\verb|{|\emph{width}\verb|}{|\emph{height}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{MakeTextField}\verb|{|\emph{width}\verb|}{|\emph{height}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{MakeChoiceField}\verb|{|\emph{width}\verb|}{|\emph{height}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+\begin{cmdsyntax}
+\ci{MakeButtonField}\verb|{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+\end{cmdsyntax}
+
+These macros default to \verb|\vbox to #2{\hbox to #1{\hfill}\vfill}|, except the
+last, which defaults to \#1; it is used for buttons, and the special \ci{Submit} and \ci{Reset}
+macros.
+
+You may also want to redefine the following macros:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\def\DefaultHeightofSubmit{12pt}
+\def\DefaultWidthofSubmit{2cm}
+\def\DefaultHeightofReset{12pt}
+\def\DefaultWidthofReset{2cm}
+\def\DefaultHeightofCheckBox{0.8\baselineskip}
+\def\DefaultWidthofCheckBox{0.8\baselineskip}
+\def\DefaultHeightofChoiceMenu{0.8\baselineskip}
+\def\DefaultWidthofChoiceMenu{0.8\baselineskip}
+\def\DefaultHeightofText{\baselineskip}
+\def\DefaultHeightofTextMultiline{4\baselineskip}
+\def\DefaultWidthofText{3cm}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Forms environment parameters}
+
+\smallskip
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}l>{\itshape}lp{9cm}@{}}
+action & URL & The URL that will receive the form data if a \textsf{Submit} button is included in the form \\
+encoding & name & The encoding for the string set to the URL; FDF-encoding is usual, and \texttt{html} is the only
+ valid value \\
+method & name & Used only when generating HTML; values can be \texttt{post} or \texttt{get} \\
+\end{longtable}
+
+\subsection{Forms optional parameters}
+Note that all colors must be expressed as RGB triples, in the range 0..1 (i.e.\ \texttt{color=0 0
+0.5})
+
+\smallskip
+\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}ll@{}}
+accesskey & key & & (as per HTML) \\
+align & number & 0 & alignment within text field; 0 is left-aligned,\\*
+ & & & 1 is centered, 2 is right-aligned. \\
+altname & name & & alternative name,\\*
+ & & & the name shown in the user interface\\
+backgroundcolor & & & color of box \\
+bordercolor & & & color of border \\
+bordersep & & & box border gap \\
+borderwidth & & 1 & width of box border, the value is a dimension\\
+ & & & or a number with default unit bp\\
+calculate & & & JavaScript code to calculate the value of the field \\
+charsize & dimen & & font size of field text \\
+checkboxsymbol & char & 4 (\ding{\number`4}) & symbol used for check boxes (ZapfDingbats), \\
+&&& the value is a character or \cs{ding}\verb|{|\texttt{\itshape number}\verb|}|, \\
+&&& see package \xpackage{pifont} from bundle \xpackage{psnfss} \\
+checked & boolean & false & whether option selected by default \\
+color & & & color of text in box \\
+combo & boolean & false & choice list is `combo' style \\
+default & & & default value \\
+disabled & boolean & false & field disabled \\
+format & & & JavaScript code to format the field \\
+height & dimen & & height of field box \\
+hidden & boolean & false & field hidden \\
+keystroke & & & JavaScript code to control the keystrokes on entry \\
+mappingname & name & & the mapping name to be used when exporting\\*
+ & & & the field data\\
+maxlen & number & 0 & number of characters allowed in text field \\
+menulength & number & 4 & number of elements shown in list \\
+multiline & boolean & false & whether text box is multiline \\
+name & name & & name of field (defaults to label) \\
+onblur & & & JavaScript code \\
+onchange & & & JavaScript code \\
+onclick & & & JavaScript code \\
+ondblclick & & & JavaScript code \\
+onfocus & & & JavaScript code \\
+onkeydown & & & JavaScript code \\
+onkeypress & & & JavaScript code \\
+onkeyup & & & JavaScript code \\
+onmousedown & & & JavaScript code \\
+onmousemove & & & JavaScript code \\
+onmouseout & & & JavaScript code \\
+onmouseover & & & JavaScript code \\
+onmouseup & & & JavaScript code \\
+onselect & & & JavaScript code \\
+password & boolean & false & text field is `password' style \\
+popdown & boolean & false & choice list is `popdown' style \\
+radio & boolean & false & choice list is `radio' style \\
+radiosymbol & char & H (\ding{\number`H}) & symbol used for radio fields (ZapfDingbats), \\
+&&& the value is a character or \cs{ding}\verb|{|\texttt{\itshape number}\verb|}|, \\
+&&& see package \xpackage{pifont} from bundle \xpackage{psnfss} \\
+readonly & boolean & false & field is readonly \\
+rotation & number & 0 & rotation of the widget annotation \\*
+ & & & (degree, counterclockwise, multiple of 90)\\
+tabkey & & & (as per HTML) \\
+validate & & & JavaScript code to validate the entry \\
+value & & & initial value \\
+width & dimen & & width of field box
+\end{longtable}
+
+\section{Defining a new driver}
+A hyperref driver has to provide definitions for eight macros:
+
+\smallskip
+\noindent 1. \verb|\hyper@anchor|
+
+\noindent 2. \verb|\hyper@link|
+
+\noindent 3. \verb|\hyper@linkfile|
+
+\noindent 4. \verb|\hyper@linkurl|
+
+\noindent 5. \verb|\hyper@anchorstart|
+
+\noindent 6. \verb|\hyper@anchorend|
+
+\noindent 7. \verb|\hyper@linkstart|
+
+\noindent 8. \verb|\hyper@linkend|
+\smallskip
+
+The draft option defines the macros as follows
+\begin{verbatim}
+\let\hyper@@anchor\@gobble
+\gdef\hyper@link##1##2##3{##3}%
+\def\hyper@linkurl##1##2{##1}%
+\def\hyper@linkfile##1##2##3{##1}%
+\let\hyper@anchorstart\@gobble
+\let\hyper@anchorend\@empty
+\let\hyper@linkstart\@gobbletwo
+\let\hyper@linkend\@empty
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Special support for other packages}
+
+Package \xpackage{hyperref} aims to cooperate with other packages, but there are
+several possible sources for conflict, such as
+
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item Packages that manipulate the bibliographic mechanism. Peter
+William's \xpackage{harvard} package is supported. However, the
+recommended package is Patrick Daly's \xpackage{natbib} package that has
+specific \xpackage{hyperref} hooks to allow reliable interaction. This
+package covers a very wide variety of layouts and citation styles, all
+of which work with \xpackage{hyperref}.
+
+\item Packages that typeset the contents of the \ci{label} and \ci{ref}
+macros, such as \xpackage{showkeys}. Since the \xpackage{hyperref} package
+redefines these commands, you must set \texttt{implicit=false} for these
+packages to work.
+
+\item Packages that do anything serious with the index.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The \xpackage{hyperref} package is distributed with variants on two useful
+packages designed to work especially well with it. These are \xpackage{xr}
+and \xpackage{minitoc}, which support crossdocument links using \hologo{LaTeX}'s
+normal \cs{label}/\cs{ref} mechanisms and per-chapter tables of contents,
+respectively.
+
+
+\subsection{Package Compatibility}
+
+Currently only package loading orders are available:
+
+
+
+Note: hyperref loads package \xpackage{nameref} at \verb|\begin{document}|.
+Sometimes this is too late, thus this package must be loaded
+earlier.
+
+
+\subsubsection{algorithm}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{float}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage[chapter]{algorithm}% eg.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{amsmath}
+
+ The environments equation and eqnarray are not supported too well.
+ For example, there might be spacing problems (eqnarray isn't recommended
+ anyway, see CTAN:info/l2tabu/, the situation for equation is unclear,
+ because nobody is interested in investigating). Consider using the
+ environments that package amsmath provide, e.g. gather for equation.
+ The environment equation can even redefined to use gather:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{amsmath}
+ \let\equation\gather
+ \let\endequation\endgather
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{amsrefs}
+
+ Package loading order:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{amsrefs}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{arydshln, longtable}
+
+ Package longtable must be put before hyperref and arydshln,
+ hyperref after arydshln generates an error, thus the
+ resulting package order is then:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{longtable}
+ \usepacakge{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{arydshln}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{babel/magyar.ldf}
+
+ The old version 2005/03/30 v1.4j will not work.
+ You need at least version 1.5, maintained by P\'eter Szab\'o,
+ see CTAN:language/hungarian/babel/.
+
+
+\subsubsection{babel/spanish.ldf}
+
+ Babel's spanish.ldf redefines `\verb|\.|' to support `\verb|\...|'.
+ In bookmarks (\verb|\pdfstringdef|) only `\verb|\.|' is supported.
+ If `\verb|\...|' is needed,
+ \verb|\texorpdfstring{\...}{\dots}|
+ can be used instead.
+
+
+\subsubsection{bibentry}
+
+ Workaround:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \makeatletter
+ \let\saved@bibitem\@bibitem
+ \makeatother
+
+ \usepackage{bibentry}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+
+ \begin{document}
+
+ \begingroup
+ \makeatletter
+ \let\@bibitem\saved@bibitem
+ \nobibliography{database}
+ \endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{bigfoot}
+
+ Hyperref does not support package `bigfoot'. And package
+ `bigfoot' does not support hyperref's footnotes and disables
+ them (hyperfootnotes=false).
+
+
+\subsubsection{chappg}
+
+ Package `chappg' uses \verb|\@addtoreset| that is redefined by `hyperref'.
+ The package order is therefore:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{chappg}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{cite}
+
+ This is from Mike Shell:
+ cite.sty cannot currently be used with hyperref.
+ However, I can do a workaround via:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \makeatletter
+ \def\NAT@parse{\typeout{This is a fake Natbib command to fool Hyperref.}}
+ \makeatother
+
+ \usepackage[hypertex]{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ so that hyperref will not redefine any of the biblabel stuff - so cite.sty
+ will work as normal - although the citations will not be hyperlinked, of
+ course (But this may not be an issue for many people).
+
+
+\subsubsection{count1to}
+
+ Package `count1to' adds several \verb|\@addtoreset| commands that confuse
+ `hyperref'. Therefore \verb|\theH<...>| has to be fixed:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{count1to}
+ \AtBeginDocument{% *after* \usepackage{count1to}
+ \renewcommand*{\theHsection}{\theHchapter.\arabic{section}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\theHsubsection}{\theHsection.\arabic{subsection}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\theHsubsubsection}{\theHsubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\theHparagraph}{\theHsubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\theHsubparagraph}{\theHparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}%
+ }
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{dblaccnt}
+
+ pd1enc.def or puenc.def should be loaded before:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{dblaccnt}
+\end{verbatim}
+ or see entry for \xoption{vietnam}.
+
+
+\subsubsection{easyeqn}
+ Not compatible, breaks.
+
+
+\subsubsection{ellipsis}
+
+ This packages redefines \verb|\textellipsis|
+ after package hyperref (pd1enc.def/puenc.def should be loaded before):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{ellipsis}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{float}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{float}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Several \verb|\caption| commands are not supported inside one float object.
+ \item Anchor are set at top of the float object, if its style is controlled
+ by float.sty.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsubsection{endnotes}
+ Unsupported.
+
+\subsubsection{foiltex}
+ Update to version 2008/01/28 v2.1.4b:
+ Since version 6.77a hyperref does not hack into \verb|\@begindvi|,
+ it uses package `atbegshi' instead, that hooks into \verb|\shipout|.
+ Thus the patch of `foils.cls' regarding hyperref is now obsolete
+ and causes an undefined error message about \verb|\@hyperfixhead|.
+ This is fixed in FoilTeX 2.1.4b.
+
+
+\subsubsection{footnote}
+
+ This package is not supported, you have to disable hyperref's footnote
+ support by using option \verb"hyperfootnotes=false".
+
+
+\subsubsection{geometry}
+
+ Driver `dvipdfm' and program `dvipdfm' might generate a warning:
+ Sorry. Too late to change page size
+ Then prefer the program `dvipdfmx' or use one of the following
+ workarounds to move the \verb|\special| of geometry to an earlier
+ location:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass[dvipdfm]{article}% or other classes
+ \usepackage{atbegshi}
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \let\OrgAtBeginDvi\AtBeginDvi
+ \let\AtBeginDvi\AtBeginShipoutFirst
+ }
+ \usepackage[
+ paperwidth=170mm,
+ paperheight=240mm
+ ]{geometry}
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \let\AtBeginDvi\OrgAtBeginDvi
+ }
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+
+ or
+
+ \documentclass[dvipdfm]{article}% or other classes
+ \usepackage{atbegshi}
+ \let\AtBeginDvi\AtBeginShipoutFirst
+ \usepackage[
+ paperwidth=170mm,
+ paperheight=240mm
+ ]{geometry}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{IEEEtran.cls}
+
+ version $\ge$ V1.6b (because of \verb|\@makecaption|, see ChangeLog)
+
+
+\subsubsection{index}
+
+ version $\ge$ 1995/09/28 v4.1 (because of \verb|\addcontentsline| redefinition)
+
+
+\subsubsection{lastpage}
+
+ Compatible.
+
+
+\subsubsection{linguex}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{linguex}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{ltabptch}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{longtable}
+ \usepackage{ltabptch}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{mathenv}
+
+ Unsupported.
+
+
+
+ Both `mathenv' and `hyperref' messes around with
+ environment `eqnarray'. You can load `mathenv' after
+ `hyperref' to avoid an error message. But \verb|\label|
+ will not work inside environment `eqnarray' properly,
+ for example.
+
+
+\subsubsection{minitoc-hyper}
+
+ This package is obsolete, use the uptodate original
+ package minitoc instead.
+
+
+\subsubsection{multind}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{multind}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{natbib}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{natbib}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{nomencl}
+Example for introducing links for the page numbers:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewcommand*{\pagedeclaration}[1]{\unskip, \hyperpage{#1}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+For equations the following might work:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \renewcommand*{\eqdeclaration}[1]{%
+ \hyperlink{equation.#1}{(Equation~#1)}%
+ }
+ But the mapping from the equation number to the anchor name
+ is not available in general.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{parskip}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{parskip}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}[2012/08/20]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+ Both packages want to redefine \verb|\@starttoc|.
+
+
+\subsubsection{prettyref}
+\begin{verbatim}
+%%% example for prettyref %%%
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{prettyref}
+\usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref}
+
+%\newrefformat{FIG}{Figure~\ref{#1}}% without hyperref
+\newrefformat{FIG}{\hyperref[{#1}]{Figure~\ref*{#1}}}
+
+\begin{document}
+ This is a reference to \prettyref{FIG:ONE}.
+ \newpage
+ \begin{figure}
+ \caption{This is my figure}
+ \label{FIG:ONE}
+ \end{figure}
+\end{document}
+%%% example for prettyref %%%
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{ntheorem}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ ntheorem-hyper.sty is an old patched version of ntheorem.sty.
+ Newer versions of ntheorem know the option hyperref:
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage[hyperref]{ntheorem}
+ But there are still unsolved problems (options thref, ...).
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{setspace}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{setspace}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{sidecap}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ Before 2002/05/24 v1.5h:
+ \usepackage{nameref}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{sidecap}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{subfigure}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ 1995/03/06 v2.0:
+ \usepackage{subfigure}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ % hypertexnames is set to false.
+ v2.1:
+ \usepackage{nameref}
+ \usepackage{subfigure}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ or
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{subfigure}
+ v2.1.2:
+ please update
+ v2.1.3:
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \usepackage{subfigure}
+ or vice versa?
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{titleref}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{nameref}
+ \usepackage{titleref}% without usetoc
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{tabularx}
+
+ Linked footnotes are not supported inside environment `tabularx',
+ because they uses the optional argument of \verb|\footnotetext|, see
+ section `Limitations'. Before version 2011/09/28 6.82i
+ hyperref had disabled footnotes entirely by `hyperfootnotes=false'.
+
+
+\subsubsection{titlesec}
+
+ \xpackage{nameref} supports titlesec, but hyperref does not
+ (unsolved is the anchor setting, missing with unnumbered
+ section, perhaps problems with page breaks with numbered ones).
+
+
+\subsubsection{ucs/utf8x.def}
+
+ The first time a multibyte UTF8 sequence is called, it
+ does some calculations and stores the result in a macro
+ for speeding up the next calls of that UTF8 sequence.
+ However this makes the first call non-expandable and
+ will break if used in information entries or bookmarks.
+ Package \xpackage{ucs} offers \verb|\PrerenderUnicode| or \verb|\PreloadUnicodePage|
+ to solve this:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{ucs}
+ \usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}% or with option unicode
+ \PrerenderUnicode{^^c3^^b6}% or \PrerenderUnicodePage{1}
+ \hypersetup{pdftitle={Umlaut example: ^^c3^^b6}}
+\end{verbatim}
+ The notation with two carets avoids trouble with 8-bit bytes
+ for the README file, you can use the characters directly.
+
+
+\subsubsection{varioref}
+ There are too many problems with varioref. Nobody has time to
+ sort them out. Therefore this package is now unsupported.
+
+
+ Perhaps you are lucky and some of the features of varioref works
+ with the following loading order:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{nameref}
+ \usepackage{varioref}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+ Also some babel versions can be problematic. For exmample,
+ 2005/05/21 v3.8g contains a patch for varioref that breaks
+ the hyperref support for varioref.
+
+
+
+ Also unsupported:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \verb|\Ref|, \verb|\Vref| do not uppercase the first letter.
+\item \verb|\vpageref[]{...}|
+ On the same page a previous space is not suppressed.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsubsection{verse}
+
+ Version 2005/08/22 v2.22 contains support for hyperref.
+
+ For older versions see example from
+ de.comp.text.tex (2005/08/11, slightly modified):
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass{article}
+
+ % package order does not matter
+ \usepackage{verse}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+
+ \makeatletter
+ % make unique poemline anchors
+ \newcounter{verse@env}
+ \setcounter{verse@env}{0}
+ \let\org@verse\verse
+ \def\verse{%
+ \stepcounter{verse@env}%
+ \org@verse
+ }
+ \def\theHpoemline{\arabic{verse@env}.\thepoemline}
+
+ % add anchor for before \addcontentsline in \@vsptitle
+ \let\org@vsptitle\@vsptitle
+ \def\@vsptitle{%
+ \phantomsection
+ \org@vsptitle
+ }
+ \makeatother
+
+ \begin{document}
+
+ \poemtitle{Poem 1}
+ \begin{verse}
+ An one-liner.
+ \end{verse}
+
+ \newpage
+
+ \poemtitle{Poem 2}
+ \begin{verse}
+ Another one-liner.
+ \end{verse}
+
+ \end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{vietnam}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ % pd1enc.def should be loaded before package dblaccnt:
+ \usepackage[PD1,OT1]{fontenc}
+ \usepackage{vietnam}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{XeTeX}
+
+ Default for the encoding of bookmarks is `pdfencoding=auto'.
+ That means the strings are always treated as unicode strings.
+ Only if the string restricts to the printable ASCII set,
+ it is written as ASCII string. The reason is that the
+ \verb|\special| does not support PDFDocEncoding.
+
+ In older versions hyperref contained special conversion code from
+ UTF-16BE back to UTF-8 in a number of places for
+ xetex to avoid the xdvipdfmx warning
+
+ \verb"Failed to convert input string to UTF16..."
+
+ This is no longer needed with a current xdvipdfmx, so this code has
+ been removed. \verb|\csname HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue\endcsname| should no
+ longer be used.
+
+
+\section[Limitations]{Limitations%
+\footnote{This section moved from the README file, needs more integration into the manual}}
+\subsection{Wrapped/broken link support}
+
+ Only few drivers support automatically wrapped/broken links,
+ e.g. pdftex, dvipdfm, hypertex. Other drivers lack this
+ feature, e.g. dvips, dvipsone.
+
+ Workarounds:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item For long section or caption titles in the table of contents
+ or list of figures/tables option \xoption{linktocpage} can be used.
+ Then the page number will be a link, and the overlong section
+ title is not forced into an one line link with overfull \verb|\hbox|
+ warning.
+\item ``\verb|\url|''s are caught by package \xpackage{breakurl}.
+\item The option \xoption{breaklinks} is intended for internal use. But it
+ can be used to force link wrapping, e.g. when printing a
+ document. However, when such a document is converted to PDF
+ and viewed with a PDF viewer, the active link area will be
+ misplaced.
+
+ Another limitation: some penalties are ``optimized'' by TeX,
+ thus there are missing break points, especially within
+ \verb|\url|. (See thread ``hyperref.sty, breaklinks and url.sty 3.2''
+ in comp.text.tex 2005-09).
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Links across pages}
+
+ In general they have problems:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Some driver doesn't support them at all (see above).
+ \item The driver allows it, but the link result might include
+ the footer and/or header, or an error message can
+ occur sometimes.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Footnotes}
+
+ LaTeX allows the separation of the footnote mark and the
+ footnote text (\verb|\footnotemark|, \verb|\footnotetext|). This interface
+ might be enough for visual typesetting. But the relation between
+ \verb|\footnotemark| to \verb|\footnotetext| is not as strong as \verb|\ref| to \verb|\label|.
+ Therefore it is not clear in general which \verb|\footnotemark| references
+ which \verb|\footnotetext|. But that is necessary to implement hyperlinking.
+ Thus the implementation of hyperref does not support the optional
+ argument of \verb|\footnotemark| and \verb|\footnotetext|.
+
+
+\section[Hints]{Hints%
+\footnote{This section moved from the README file, needs more integration into the manual}}
+
+\subsection{Spaces in option values}
+
+ Unhappily LaTeX strips spaces from options if they are given
+ in \verb|\documentclass| or \verb|\usepackage| (or \verb|\RequirePackage|), e.g.:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[pdfborder=0 0 1]{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Package hyperref now gets
+\begin{verbatim}
+ pdfborder=001
+\end{verbatim}
+ and the result is an invalid PDF file.
+ As workaround braces can be used:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[pdfborder={0 0 1}]{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Some options can also be given in \verb|\hypersetup|
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \hypersetup{pdfborder=0 0 1}
+\end{verbatim}
+ In \verb|\hypersetup| the options are directly processed as key value
+ options (see package keyval) without space stripping in the value part.
+
+
+
+ Alternatively, LaTeX's option handling system can be adapted
+ to key value options by one of the packages \xpackage{kvoptions-patch}
+ (from project \xpackage{kvoptions}) or \xpackage{xkvltxp} (from project \xpackage{xsetkeys}).
+
+
+\subsection{Index with makeindex}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Package hyperref adds \verb|\hyperpage| commands by the encap
+ mechanism (see documentation of Makeindex),
+ if option hyperindex is set (default).
+ \verb|\hyperpage| uses the page anchors that are set by
+ hyperref at each page (default). However in the
+ default case page numbers are used in anchor names
+ in arabic form. If the page numbers in other formats
+ are used (book class with \verb|\frontmatter|, \verb|\romannumbering|, ...),
+ then the page anchors are not unique. Therefore option
+ \verb"plainpages=false" is recommended.
+ \item The encap mechanism of Makeindex allows to use one command only
+ (see documentation of Makeindex).
+ If the user sets such a command, hyperref suppresses its
+ \verb|\hyperpage| command. With logical markup this situation
+ can easily be solved:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{makeidx}
+ \makeindex
+ \usepackage[hyperindex]{hyperref}
+ \newcommand*{\main}[1]{\textbf{\hyperpage{#1}}}
+ ...
+ \index{Some example|main}
+\end{verbatim}
+ \item Scientic Word/Scientific WorkPlace users can use
+ package robustindex with hyperindex=false.
+ \item Other encap characters can be set by option \xoption{encap}.
+ Example for use of ``?'':
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[encap=?]{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+ \item Another possibility is the insertion of \verb|\hyperpage| by
+ a style file for makeindex. For this case, hyperref's
+ insertion will be disabled by \verb"hyperindex=false".
+ \verb|\hyperpage| will be defined regardless of setting of hyperindex.
+\begin{verbatim}
+%%% cut %%% hyperindex.ist %%% cut %%%
+delim_0 ", \\hyperpage{"
+delim_1 ", \\hyperpage{"
+delim_2 ", \\hyperpage{"
+delim_n "}, \\hyperpage{"
+delim_t "}"
+encap_prefix "}\\"
+encap_infix "{\\hyperpage{"
+encap_suffix "}"
+%%% cut %%% hyperindex.ist %%% cut %%%
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Warning \texttt{"bookmark level for unknown <foobar> defaults to 0"}}
+
+ Getting rid of it:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\makeatletter
+\providecommand*{\toclevel@<foobar>}{0}
+\makeatother
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Link anchors in figures}
+
+ The caption command increments the counter and here is the
+ place where hyperref set the corresponding anchor. Unhappily
+ the caption is set below the figure, so the figure is not
+ visible if a link jumps to a figure.
+ In this case, try package \xpackage{hypcap} that implements
+ a method to circumvent the problem.
+
+
+\subsection{Additional unicode characters in bookmarks and pdf information entries:}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[pdftex]{article}
+\usepackage[unicode]{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Support for additional unicode characters:
+
+ Example: \verb|\.{a}| and \verb|\d{a}|
+
+ 1. Get a list with unicode data, eg:
+
+ http://www.unicode.org/Public/UNIDATA/UnicodeData.txt
+
+ 2. Identify the characters (\verb|\.{a}|, \verb|\d{a}|):
+\begin{verbatim}
+ 0227;LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DOT ABOVE;...
+ 1EA1;LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DOT BELOW;...
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ 3. Calculate the octal code:
+
+ The first characters of the line in the file are
+ hex values, convert each byte and prepend them
+ with a backslash. (This will go into the PDF file.)
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ 0227 -> \002\047
+ 1EA1 -> \036\241
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ 4. Transform into a form understood by hyperref:
+
+ Hyperref must know where the first byte starts,
+ this is marked by \verb"9" (8 and 9 cannot occur in
+ octal numbers):
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \002\047 -> \9002\047
+ \036\241 -> \9036\241
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ Optional: \verb"8" is used for abbreviations:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \900 = \80, \901 = \81, \902 = \82, ...
+
+ \9002\047 -> \82\047
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ 5. Declare the character with LaTeX:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\.}{PU}{a}{\82\047}
+\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\d}{PU}{a}{\9036\241}
+
+\begin{document}
+\section{\={a}, \d{a}, \'{a}, \.{a}}
+\end{document}
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Footnotes}
+
+ The footnote support is rather limited. It is beyond the scope
+ to use \verb|\footnotemark| and \verb|\footnotetext| out of order or reusing
+ \verb|\footnotemark|. Here you can either disable hyperref's footnote
+ support by \verb"hyperfootnotes=false" or fiddle with internal macros,
+ nasty examples:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\begin{document}
+Hello%
+\footnote{The first footnote}
+World%
+\addtocounter{footnote}{-1}%
+\addtocounter{Hfootnote}{-1}%
+\footnotemark.
+\end{document}
+
+ or
+
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\makeatletter
+
+A%
+ \footnotemark
+ \let\saved@Href@A\Hy@footnote@currentHref
+ % remember link name
+B%
+ \footnotemark
+ \let\saved@Href@B\Hy@footnote@currentHref
+b%
+ \addtocounter{footnote}{-1}%
+ \addtocounter{Hfootnote}{-1}% generate the same anchor
+ \footnotemark
+C%
+ \footnotemark
+ \let\saved@Href@C\Hy@footnote@currentHref
+
+ \addtocounter{footnote}{-2}%
+ \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@A
+\footnotetext{AAAA}%
+ \addtocounter{footnote}{1}%
+ \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@B
+\footnotetext{BBBBB}%
+ \addtocounter{footnote}{1}%
+ \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@C
+\footnotetext{CCCC}%
+
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Subordinate counters}
+
+ Some counters do not have unique values and require the value
+ of other counters to be unique. For example, sections or figures
+ might be numbered within chapters or \verb|\newtheorem| is used with
+ an optional counter argument. Internally LaTeX uses \verb|\@addtoreset|
+ to reset a counter in dependency to another counter. Package
+ hyperref hooks into \verb|\@addtoreset| to catch this situation.
+ Also \verb|\numberwithin| of package amsmath is caught by hyperref.
+
+
+
+ However, if the definition of subordinate counters take place
+ before hyperref is loaded, the old meaning of \verb|\@addtoreset| is
+ called without hyperref's additions. Then the companion counter
+ macro \verb|\theH<counter>| can be redefined accordingly. Or move the
+ definition of subordinate counters after hyperref is loaded.
+
+ Example for \verb|\newtheorem|, problematic case:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section]
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Solution a)
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section}
+\end{verbatim}
+ Solution b)
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section]
+ \usepackage{hyperref}
+ \newcommand*{\theHcorA}{\theHsection.\number\value{corA}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{History and acknowledgments}
+
+The original authors of \textsf{hyperbasics.tex} and
+\textsf{hypertex.sty}, from which this package descends, are Tanmoy
+Bhattacharya and Thorsten Ohl. Package \xpackage{hyperref}
+started as a simple port of their work to \hologo{LaTeXe} standards, but
+eventually I rewrote nearly everything, because I didn't understand a
+lot of the original, and was only interested in getting it to work with
+\hologo{LaTeX}. I would like to thank Arthur Smith, Tanmoy Bhattacharya, Mark
+Doyle, Paul Ginsparg, David Carlisle, T.\ V.\ Raman and Leslie Lamport
+for comments, requests, thoughts and code to get the package into its
+first useable state. Various other people are mentioned at the point in
+the source where I had to change the code in later versions because of
+problems they found.
+
+Tanmoy found a great many of the bugs, and (even better) often provided
+fixes, which has made the package more robust. The days spent on
+Rev\TeX\ are entirely due to him! The investigations of Bill Moss
+into the later versions including
+native PDF support uncovered a good many bugs, and his testing is
+appreciated. Hans Hagen provided a lot of
+insight into PDF.
+
+Berthold Horn provided help, encouragement and sponsorship for the
+\textsf{dvipsone} and \textsf{dviwindo} drivers. Sergey Lesenko provided
+the changes needed for \textsf{dvipdf}, and \Hanh{} supplied all the
+information needed for \textsf{pdftex}. Patrick Daly kindly updated his
+\xpackage{natbib} package to allow easy integration with
+\xpackage{hyperref}. Michael Mehlich's \xpackage{hyper} package (developed
+in parallel with \textsf{hyperref}) showed me solutions for some
+problems. Hopefully the two packages will combine one day.
+
+The forms creation section owes a great deal to: T.\ V.\ Raman, for
+encouragement, support and ideas; Thomas Merz, whose book \emph{Web
+Publishing with Acrobat/PDF} provided crucial insights; D.\ P.\ Story,
+whose detailed article about pdfmarks and forms solved many practical
+problems; and Hans Hagen, who explained how to do it in \textsf{pdftex}.
+
+Steve Peter recreated the manual source in July 2003 after it had been
+lost.
+
+Especial extra thanks to David Carlisle for the \xpackage{backref} module,
+the ps2pdf and dviwindo support, frequent general rewrites of my bad
+code, and for working on changes to the \xpackage{xr} package to suit
+\xpackage{hyperref}.
+
+\begingroup
+ \makeatletter
+ \let\chapter=\section
+ % subsections goes into bookmarks but not toc
+ \hypersetup{bookmarksopenlevel=1}
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}}
+ % The \section command acts as \subsection.
+ % Additionally the title is converted to lowercase except
+ % for the first letter.
+ \def\section{%
+ \let\section\lc@subsection
+ \lc@subsection
+ }
+ \def\lc@subsection{%
+ \@ifstar{\def\mystar{*}\lc@sec}%
+ {\let\mystar\@empty\lc@sec}%
+ }
+ \def\lc@sec#1{%
+ \lc@@sec#1\@nil
+ }
+ \def\lc@@sec#1#2\@nil{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\a{#1}%
+ \lowercase{%
+ \edef\x{\endgroup
+ \noexpand\subsection\mystar{\a#2}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \x
+ }
+ \include{fdl}
+\endgroup
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/nameref.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/nameref.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index ef19a84606..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/nameref.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty
index aeca59dd4e..d73ba4013f 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-%% xr package (beta release)
+%% xr-hyper package (beta release)
-%% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 David Carlisle
+%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 David Carlisle
%% This is a modified version of the xr package from the Standard LaTeX
%% tools distribution. It has some internal changes to cooperate with
@@ -72,9 +72,13 @@
%% 2019/10/03 v6.1
%% Incorporate updates to xr (including citation support)
%%
+%% 2020-05-14 v7.00e
+%% add additional braces to \r@ only if hyperref is not detected in the aux
+%% of the source document (https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues/118)
+%%
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesPackage{xr-hyper}
- [2019/10/03 v6.1 eXternal References (DPC)]
+ [2020-05-15 v7.00e eXternal References (DPC)]
\def\externaldocument{\@testopt\XR@cite{}}
\let\externalcitedocument\externaldocument
@@ -118,8 +122,14 @@
\read\@inputcheck to\XR@line
\expandafter\XR@test\XR@line...\XR@}
% 2019 update to match xr
+% 2020 don't extend r@-arguments if hyperref has been detected in the source
+% newlabel has already the right number of arguments
+\def\XR@HYPcompargs{{}{}{}}
\long\def\XR@test#1#2#3#4\XR@{%
\let\XR@tempa\@gobblethree
+ \ifx#1\HyperFirstAtBeginDocument
+ \def\XR@HYPcompargs{}%
+ \fi
\ifx#1\newlabel
\let\XR@tempa\@firstofthree
\else\ifx#1\XR@bibcite
@@ -128,7 +138,7 @@
\let\XR@tempa\@thirdofthree
\fi\fi\fi
\XR@tempa
- {\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname r@\XR@prefix#2\endcsname{\XR@addURL{#3}{}{}{}}}%
+ {\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname r@\XR@prefix#2\endcsname{\XR@addURL{#3}\XR@HYPcompargs}}%
{\expandafter\bibcite\expandafter{\XR@prefix#2}{#3}}%
{\edef\XR@list{\XR@list\filename@area#2\relax}}%
\ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\XR@aux
@@ -157,6 +167,4 @@
\endinput
%%
-%% End of file `xr.sty'.
-
-
+%% End of file `xr-hyper.sty'.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/README.md b/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ddd6fc54b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+ %% ReadableCV
+ %% Copyright 2020 Philip Stone
+ %
+ % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+ % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+ % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+ % The latest version of this license is in
+ % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+ % and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+ % version 2005/12/01 or later.
+ %
+ % This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+ %
+ % The Current Maintainer of this work is Philip Stone
+ %
+ % This work consists of the files ReadableCV.cls and ReadableCV.tex
+
+
+This class, ReadableCV, is a re - working of how I wrote my own CV using other software.
+The intention is that it is a highly readable CV which is easy for a company to examine.
+
+The class file has plenty of comments describing it and the accompanying .tex file,
+whilst serving as an example of how to use the class, also contains plenty comments. \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/ReadableCV.cls b/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/ReadableCV.cls
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..db6197592d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/ReadableCV.cls
@@ -0,0 +1,560 @@
+%% ReadableCV
+%% Copyright 2020 Philip Stone
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Philip Stone
+%
+% This work consists of the files ReadableCV.cls and ReadableCV.tex
+
+\def\ClassDate{2020/05/14}
+\def\ClassVersion{2.0}
+\ProvidesClass{ReadableCV}[\ClassDate ReadableCV \ClassVersion class written by Philip Stone]
+
+\LoadClass[10pt, a4paper, onecolumn, oneside, notitlepage]{article}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+
+%set up PDF metadata
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+
+% Set up paper size and language
+\RequirePackage[a4paper, total={7in, 10in}]{geometry}
+\RequirePackage{titlesec}
+\RequirePackage[nodayofweek]{datetime}
+
+% Allow use of multiple columns
+\RequirePackage{multicol}
+
+% Support for graphics, fonts and colour
+\RequirePackage{marvosym}
+\RequirePackage{graphicx}
+\RequirePackage[x11names]{xcolor}
+\RequirePackage[sfdefault,thin]{roboto}
+\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\pagestyle{empty}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+
+% Allow use of if statements
+\RequirePackage{etoolbox}
+\RequirePackage{xstring}
+
+
+% Set up whether sections align to the left or right
+\def\SectionAlignment{flushleft}
+
+\newcommand{\setSectionAlignment}[1]{
+ \IfEqCase{#1}{
+ {left}{\def\SectionAlignment{flushleft}}
+ {right}{\def\SectionAlignment{flushright}}
+ }
+}
+
+% Displays section title or heading
+\newcommand{\newHeading}[2]{
+ \begin{\SectionAlignment}
+% \vspace{\baselineskip}
+ \bigskip
+ \textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\textbf{\Large{#1}}}
+ \smallskip
+ \hrule
+% \vspace{\baselineskip}
+ \end{\SectionAlignment}
+}
+
+% Define page colour
+% Uses X11names
+\def\PageColour{white}
+\newcommand{\setPageColour}[1]{
+ \def\PageColour{#1}
+ \pagecolor{\PageColour}
+}
+
+% Define left or right aligned header
+% Can be either 'left' or 'right'
+\def\HeaderAlignment{flushright}
+% Create command to change header alignment
+\newcommand{\setHeaderAlignment}[1]{
+ \IfEqCase{#1}{
+ {left}{\def\HeaderAlignment{flushleft}}
+ {right}{\def\HeaderAlignment{flushright}}
+ }
+}
+
+% Define default colour of headings
+% Uses X11names
+\def\HeadingColour{SlateGray3}
+% Create command to change header colour
+\newcommand{\setHeadingColours}[1]{
+ \def\HeadingColour{#1}
+}
+
+\def\rcvname{}
+\def\rcvjobtitle{}
+\def\rcvmobileno{}
+\def\rcvhomeno{}
+\def\rcvemailaddr{}
+\def\rcvwebaddr{}
+
+\newcommand{\HeaderText}{
+
+ \begin{minipage}{1.0\linewidth}
+ \begin{\HeaderAlignment}
+ \textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\textbf{\Huge{\rcvname}}}\\
+ \vspace{-0.3em}
+ \LARGE{\rcvjobtitle}\\
+
+ \smallskip
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvmobileno}%
+ {
+ %if mobile number not defined
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvhomeno}%
+ {
+ % mobile and home numbers not defined
+ }
+ {
+ %mobile number not defined, home number is
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Telefon}\ \rcvhomeno\\}
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ %if mobile number defined
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvhomeno}%
+ {
+ %if mobile number defined, home number not defined
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mobilefone}\ \rcvmobileno\\}
+ }
+ {
+ %if home number and mobile number defined
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mobilefone}\ \rcvmobileno\ {\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Telefon}\ \rcvhomeno\\}}
+ }
+ }
+
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvemailaddr}%
+ {
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvwebaddr}%
+ {
+ % email and web not defined
+ }
+ {
+ %email not defined, web is
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mundus}\ \rcvwebaddr\\}
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ %if email defined
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvwebaddr}%
+ {
+ %if email defined, web not defined
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Letter}\ \rcvemailaddr\\}
+ }
+ {
+ %if email and web defined
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Letter}\ \rcvemailaddr\ {\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mundus}\ \rcvwebaddr\\}}
+ }
+ }
+ \end{\HeaderAlignment}
+ \end{minipage}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\HeaderRightContact}{
+ % Name and jobtitle on the left. Contact details on the right.
+
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ \textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\textbf{\Huge{\rcvname}}}\\
+ \vspace{-0.3em}
+ \LARGE{\rcvjobtitle}\\
+ \end{flushleft}
+ \end{minipage}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+ \begin{flushright}
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvmobileno}
+ {}
+ {\normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mobilefone}\ \rcvmobileno\\}}
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvhomeno}
+ {}
+ {\normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Telefon}\ \rcvhomeno\\}}
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvemailaddr}
+ {}
+ {\normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Letter}\ \rcvemailaddr\\}}
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvwebaddr}
+ {}
+ {\normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mundus}\ \rcvwebaddr\\}}
+ \end{flushright}
+ \end{minipage}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\HeaderLeftContact}{
+ % Name and jobtitle on the right. Contact details on the left.
+
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvmobileno}
+ {}
+ {\normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mobilefone}\ \rcvmobileno\\}}
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvhomeno}
+ {}
+ {\normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Telefon}\ \rcvhomeno\\}}
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvemailaddr}
+ {}
+ {\normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Letter}\ \rcvemailaddr\\}}
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvwebaddr}
+ {}
+ {\normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mundus}\ \rcvwebaddr\\}}
+ \end{flushleft}
+ \end{minipage}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+ \begin{flushright}
+ \textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\textbf{\Huge{\rcvname}}}\\
+ \vspace{-0.3em}
+ \LARGE{\rcvjobtitle}\\
+ \end{flushright}
+ \end{minipage}
+
+}
+
+\newcommand{\HeaderTextOppo}{
+ \IfEqCase{\HeaderAlignment}{
+ {flushleft}{\HeaderRightContact}
+ {flushright}{\HeaderLeftContact}
+ }
+}
+
+\newcommand{\HeaderLeftImage}{
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ \includegraphics[width=2.5cm,height=2.5cm,keepaspectratio]{\rcvimageloc}
+ \end{flushleft}
+ \end{minipage}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+ \begin{flushright}
+ \textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\textbf{\Huge{\rcvname}}}\\
+ \vspace{-0.3em}
+ \LARGE{\rcvjobtitle}\\
+
+ \smallskip
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvmobileno}%
+ {
+ %if mobile number not defined
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvhomeno}%
+ {
+ % mobile and home numbers not defined
+ }
+ {
+ %mobile number not defined, home number is
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Telefon}\ \rcvhomeno\\}
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ %if mobile number defined
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvhomeno}%
+ {
+ %if mobile number defined, home number not defined
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mobilefone}\ \rcvmobileno\\}
+ }
+ {
+ %if home number and mobile number defined
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mobilefone}\ \rcvmobileno\ {\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Telefon}\ \rcvhomeno\\}}
+ }
+ }
+
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvemailaddr}%
+ {
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvwebaddr}%
+ {
+ % email and web not defined
+ }
+ {
+ %email not defined, web is
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mundus}\ \rcvwebaddr\\}
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ %if email defined
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvwebaddr}%
+ {
+ %if email defined, web not defined
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Letter}\ \rcvemailaddr\\}
+ }
+ {
+ %if email and web defined
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Letter}\ \rcvemailaddr\ {\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mundus}\ \rcvwebaddr\\}}
+ }
+ }
+ \end{flushright}
+ \end{minipage}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\HeaderRightImage}{
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ \textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\textbf{\Huge{\rcvname}}}\\
+ \vspace{-0.3em}
+ \LARGE{\rcvjobtitle}\\
+
+ \smallskip
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvmobileno}%
+ {
+ %if mobile number not defined
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvhomeno}%
+ {
+ % mobile and home numbers not defined
+ }
+ {
+ %mobile number not defined, home number is
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Telefon}\ \rcvhomeno\\}
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ %if mobile number defined
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvhomeno}%
+ {
+ %if mobile number defined, home number not defined
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mobilefone}\ \rcvmobileno\\}
+ }
+ {
+ %if home number and mobile number defined
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mobilefone}\ \rcvmobileno\ {\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Telefon}\ \rcvhomeno\\}}
+ }
+ }
+
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvemailaddr}%
+ {
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvwebaddr}%
+ {
+ % email and web not defined
+ }
+ {
+ %email not defined, web is
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mundus}\ \rcvwebaddr\\}
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ %if email defined
+ \ifdefempty{\rcvwebaddr}%
+ {
+ %if email defined, web not defined
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Letter}\ \rcvemailaddr\\}
+ }
+ {
+ %if email and web defined
+ \normalsize{\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Letter}\ \rcvemailaddr\ {\textcolor{\HeadingColour}{\Mundus}\ \rcvwebaddr\\}}
+ }
+ }
+ \end{flushleft}
+ \end{minipage}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+ \begin{flushright}
+ \includegraphics[width=2.5cm,height=2.5cm,keepaspectratio]{\rcvimageloc}
+ \end{flushright}
+ \end{minipage}
+}
+
+% Define image use
+\newtoggle{useImage}
+\def\rcvimageloc{}
+
+% Set up use of image
+\newcommand{\setImage}[1]{
+ \IfEq {#1}{}{
+ \togglefalse{useImage}
+ \def\rcvimageloc{}
+ }
+ {
+ \toggletrue{useImage}
+ \def\rcvimageloc{#1}
+ }
+}
+
+\def\contactloc{below}
+
+\newcommand{\setContactLocation}[1]{
+ \IfEqCase{#1}{
+ {below}{\def\contactloc{below}}
+ {opposite}{\def\contactloc{opposite}}
+ }
+}
+
+\newcommand{\setYourName}[1]{\def\rcvname{#1}}
+\newcommand{\setYourJobTitle}[1]{\def\rcvjobtitle{#1}}
+\newcommand{\setYourMobileNo}[1]{\def\rcvmobileno{#1}}
+\newcommand{\setYourHomeNo}[1]{\def\rcvhomeno{#1}}
+\newcommand{\setYourEmailAddr}[1]{\def\rcvemailaddr{#1}}
+\newcommand{\setYourWebAddr}[1]{\def\rcvwebaddr{#1}}
+
+% Display header
+\newcommand{\showHeader}{
+
+ \hypersetup
+ {
+ pdftitle = {CV for \rcvname},
+ pdfauthor = {\rcvname},
+ pdfsubject = {CV for \rcvname},
+ pdfkeywords = {CV, curriculum, vitae, resume, \rcvname, \rcvjobtitle},
+ pdfproducer = {ReadableCV \ClassVersion\ template written by Philip Stone}
+ }
+
+ \iftoggle{useImage}%
+ {
+ % Image present
+ \IfEqCase{\HeaderAlignment}{
+ {flushleft}{\HeaderRightImage}
+ {flushright}{\HeaderLeftImage}
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ % Image not present
+ \IfEqCase{\contactloc}{
+ {below}{\HeaderText}
+ {opposite}{\HeaderTextOppo}
+ }
+ }
+
+ \vspace{\baselineskip}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\addSkills}[9]{
+ \def\sone{#1}
+ \def\stwo{#2}
+ \def\sthree{#3}
+ \def\sfour{#4}
+ \def\sfive{#5}
+ \def\ssix{#6}
+ \def\sseven{#7}
+ \def\seight{#8}
+ \def\snine{#9}
+
+ \begin{multicols}{3}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \ifdefempty{\sone}{}{\item \sone}
+ \ifdefempty{\stwo}{}{\item \stwo}
+ \ifdefempty{\sthree}{}{\item \sthree}
+ \ifdefempty{\sfour}{}{\item \sfour}
+ \ifdefempty{\sfive}{}{\item \sfive}
+ \ifdefempty{\ssix}{}{\item \ssix}
+ \ifdefempty{\sseven}{}{\item \sseven}
+ \ifdefempty{\seight}{}{\item \seight}
+ \ifdefempty{\snine}{}{\item \snine}
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{multicols}
+}
+
+% Set up whether job title or company printed first
+\newtoggle{jobfirst}
+\toggletrue{jobfirst}
+
+\newcommand{\setJobCompanyOrder}[1]{
+ \IfEqCase{#1}{
+ {JobFirst}{\toggletrue{jobfirst}}
+ {CompanyFirst}{\togglefalse{jobfirst}}
+ }
+}
+
+\newcommand{\newRole}[4]{
+ % This displays the whole of the role information
+ % including dates [1], job title [2],
+ % company name [3] and role summary [4]
+
+ \iftoggle{jobfirst}{
+ % Display job before company
+ \begin{tabular}{@{}p{3cm} l}
+ \textbf{#1} & \textbf{#2}\\
+ & \textbf{#3}\\
+ \end{tabular}
+ }
+ {
+ % Display company before job
+ \begin{tabular}{@{}p{3cm} l}
+ \textbf{#1} & \textbf{#3}\\
+ & \textbf{#2}\\
+ \end{tabular}
+ }
+
+ \vspace{\baselineskip}
+ \textit{Role outline} \par \par \hspace{2em}#4 \bigskip
+}
+
+\newcommand{\roleAchievements}[5]{
+ % Adds up to five achievements in an itemized list
+ \textit{Key achievements} \par \par
+
+ \def\aone{#1}
+ \def\atwo{#2}
+ \def\athree{#3}
+ \def\afour{#4}
+ \def\afive{#5}
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \ifdefempty{\aone}{}{\item \aone}
+ \ifdefempty{\atwo}{}{\item \atwo}
+ \ifdefempty{\athree}{}{\item \athree}
+ \ifdefempty{\afour}{}{\item \afour}
+ \ifdefempty{\afive}{}{\item \afive}
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ \bigskip
+}
+
+\newcommand{\newCourse}[4]{
+% Allows the display of a new course. Arguments are
+% [1] date, [2] course title, [3] awarding body.
+% If JobFirst set then course title will be first
+% If CompanyFirst set then awarding body will be first
+
+ \iftoggle{jobfirst}{
+ % Display job before company
+ \begin{tabular}{@{}p{3cm} l}
+ \textbf{#1} & \textbf{#2} (#3)\\
+ \end{tabular}
+}
+{
+ % Display company before job
+ \begin{tabular}{@{}p{3cm} l}
+ \textbf{#1} & \textbf{#3} (#2)\\
+ \end{tabular}
+}
+}
+
+% Recipients address
+\def\recpname{}
+\def\recpjobtitle{}
+\def\recproad{}
+\def\recptown{}
+\def\recpcity{}
+\def\recppostcode{}
+
+\newcommand{\setRecpName}[1]{\def\recpname{#1}}
+\newcommand{\setRecpJobTitle}[1]{\def\recpjobtitle{#1}}
+\newcommand{\setRecpRoad}[1]{\def\recproad{#1}}
+\newcommand{\setRecpTown}[1]{\def\recptown{#1}}
+\newcommand{\setRecpCity}[1]{\def\recpcity{#1}}
+\newcommand{\setRecpPostcode}[1]{\def\recppostcode{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\makeLetter}{
+ \begin{flushright}
+ \today
+ \end{flushright}
+
+ \bigskip \bigskip
+
+ \recpname \\
+ \ifdefempty{\recpjobtitle}{}{\recpjobtitle \\}
+ \recproad \\ \recptown \\ \recpcity \\ \recppostcode
+
+ \bigskip
+
+}
+
+% Finish letter image of signature and your name
+\newcommand{\closeletter}[1]{%
+ \includegraphics{#1}\\ \bigskip \rcvname
+} \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/ReadableCV.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/ReadableCV.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..509ceae98a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/ReadableCV.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/ReadableCV.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/ReadableCV.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3a148b61a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/ReadableCV.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+\documentclass{ReadableCV}
+
+% Set color of body text
+\color{black}
+
+% Set indent and paragraph formatting
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\addtolength{\parskip}{6pt}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% Set page colour using X11names colour definitions
+\setPageColour{white}
+
+% Set header details being aligned to the right or left
+% If an image is displayed it will be shown on the
+% opposite side to what is set here.
+\setHeaderAlignment{right}
+
+% Set colour of all headings, header highlights
+\setHeadingColours{SlateGray3}
+
+% Set image file to be displayed in header
+% If left blank no image is displayed
+%\setImage{profilepic.jpg}
+
+% If image not being displayed then user can
+% move contact details to opposite side of
+% page to name and jobtitle.
+% Use either opposite or below
+\setContactLocation{opposite}
+
+% Set up information needed for header.
+% If you do not want to include certain
+% information use {} instead.
+\setYourName{Joe Bloggs}
+\setYourJobTitle{General Dogs - Body}
+\setYourMobileNo{0712 345 6789}
+\setYourHomeNo{0123 456 7890}
+\setYourEmailAddr{joebloggs@gmail.com}
+\setYourWebAddr{www.joebloggs.co.uk}
+
+% Display header information
+\showHeader
+
+% Set up whether section headings are on the left or right
+\setSectionAlignment{left}
+
+% Creates a new section title / heading
+\newHeading{Personal Profile}
+
+Write some text here that explains a bit about what you can offer, things you have achieved etc.\ This should be around 4 - 6 lines but is entirely up to the user.
+
+\newHeading{Core Skills}
+
+% Add up to nine core skills. If they are
+% all not needed use {} instead.
+\addSkills{one}{two}{three}
+ {four}{five}{six}
+ {seven}{eight}{nine}
+
+\newHeading{Career Summary}
+
+% Set up whether job title or company printed first
+% Either use JobFirst or CompanyFirst
+\setJobCompanyOrder{JobFirst}
+
+% This displays the whole of the role information
+% including dates [1], job title [2],
+% company name [3] and role summary [4]
+% If a full history is required use \newrole and \roleAchievements
+% If only a brief description needed then just use \newrole
+\newRole{2013 - present}
+ {General Dogs - Body}
+ {Bigcorp}
+ {A short summary broadly detailing what the role involves.}
+
+\roleAchievements{one}
+ {two}
+ {three}
+ {four}
+ {five}
+
+\newRole{2000 - 2013}
+ {Dishwasher}
+ {Fleece them cafe}
+ {A short summary broadly detailing what the role involves.}
+
+% This tends to be any training work send you on
+\newHeading{Professional Development}
+
+% Allows the display of a new course. Arguments are
+% [1] date, [2] course title, [3] awarding body and [4] grade
+% Leave grade blank if not required.
+% If JobFirst set then course title will be first
+% If CompanyFirst set then awarding body will be first
+\newCourse{2018}
+ {Course Title}
+ {Awarding body}
+ {Grade}
+
+% This is training you have done in your own time
+\newHeading{Personal Development}
+
+\newCourse{2018}
+ {Course Title}
+ {Awarding body}
+ {Grade}
+
+% School education
+\newHeading{Education}
+
+\newCourse{2018}
+ {Course Title}
+ {Awarding body}
+ {Grade}
+
+\clearpage
+
+% Anything below creates a letter
+
+% Displays same header as on CV
+\showHeader
+
+% Name and address must be present but
+% job title is optional
+\setRecpName{Mr Deeds}
+\setRecpJobTitle{Hiring Manager}
+\setRecpRoad{BigCorp Road}
+\setRecpTown{BigCorp Town}
+\setRecpCity{BigCorp City}
+\setRecpPostcode{X12 3YZ}
+
+\makeLetter
+
+% Do not delete \recpname unless you want to call the
+% recipient something other than the name defined above.
+Dear \recpname,
+
+% Do not remove the following line
+\bigskip
+
+Please find enclosed my CV in application for the post advertised in the [insert place advertised] on [date advert seen].
+
+The nature of my degree course has prepared me for this position. It involved a great deal of independent research, requiring initiative, self-motivation and a wide range of skills. For one course, [insert course], an understanding of the [insert sector] industry was essential. I found this subject very stimulating.
+
+I am a fast and accurate writer, with a keen eye for detail and I should be very grateful for the opportunity to progress to market reporting. I am able to take on the responsibility of this position immediately, and have the enthusiasm and determination to ensure that I make a success of it.
+
+Thank you for taking the time to consider this application and I look forward to hearing from you in the near future.
+
+% Do not remove the following line
+\bigskip
+
+Yours sincerely, % if the opening is "Dear Mr(s) Doe,"
+%Yours faithfully, % if the opening is "Dear Sir or Madam,"
+
+% Insert name of image with your signature
+% If paper colour is not white best to use PNG
+% with transparency.
+\closeletter{sig.png}
+
+\end{document} \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/profilepic.jpg b/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/profilepic.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b24d61d234
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/profilepic.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/sig.png b/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/sig.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..eed50df57c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/readablecv/sig.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/vcell/README.md b/macros/latex/contrib/vcell/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..15f8c63b82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/vcell/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+The LaTeX `vcell` package
+===========================
+
+Vertical alignment of content inside table cells
+
+Release 2020-05-15
+
+Overview
+--------
+
+This package offers low-level macros to build rows with
+vertically-aligned cells (top, middle or bottom) and
+calculate the height of a row. Those cells can have
+variable or fixed height and can be paragraph-cells
+or inline-cells. Different vertical alignments can be
+used in the same row.
+
+Documentation
+-------------
+
+Please refer to `vcell.pdf`. The documentation offers
+several examples on how to use this package with other
+packages.
+
+Licence
+-------
+
+The contents of this package are distributed under the [LaTeX Project
+Public License](https://www.latex-project.org/lppl/lppl-1-3c/),
+version 1.3c or later.
+
+Author & Copyright
+------------------
+
+Copyright (C) 2020- Xavier Dionne <info@latex-tables.com> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/vcell/vcell.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/vcell/vcell.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1389e0ad60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/vcell/vcell.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/vcell/vcell.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/vcell/vcell.sty
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4c8957a0ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/vcell/vcell.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+%
+% vcell.sty V1.0 version (15-May-2020)
+%
+% Author: Xavier Dionne <info@latex-tables.com>
+%
+% Licence :
+%
+% The contents of this package are distributed under the LaTeX Project
+% Public License, version 1.3c or later.
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl/lppl-1-3c/
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/06/01]
+\ProvidesPackage{vcell}[2020/05/15 v1.0]
+\newdimen\rowheight
+\newdimen\rowht
+\newdimen\rowdp
+\newcount\@cellcount
+\newcount\@cellusecount
+\newbox\@celltemp
+
+\def\resetcellcount{%
+ \global\@cellusecount 1\relax\global\@cellcount 1\relax%
+ \global\setlength\rowht{\arraystretch\ht\strutbox}%
+ \global\setlength\rowdp{\arraystretch\dp\strutbox}%
+ \global\setlength\rowheight{\dimexpr\rowht+\rowdp}%
+}
+
+\resetcellcount
+
+\def\savecellheight{%
+ \ifdim\ht\@celltemp>\rowht\global\setlength{\rowht}{\ht\@celltemp}\fi%
+ \ifdim\dp\@celltemp>\rowdp\global\setlength{\rowdp}{\ht\@celltemp}\fi%
+ \ifdim\dimexpr\dp\@celltemp+\ht\@celltemp>\rowheight{\global\setlength{\rowheight}{\dimexpr\dp\@celltemp+\ht\@celltemp}}\fi
+}
+\long\def\savecellbox#1{%
+ \global\sbox\@celltemp{\hbox{\ifdim\hsize=\textwidth #1\else \vbox{#1}\fi}}%
+ \savecellheight%
+ \parbox{0pt}{\vrule height \ht\@celltemp depth \dp\@celltemp width 0pt}%
+ \global\expandafter\newbox\csname @cellbox\the\@cellcount\endcsname%
+ \global\expandafter\sbox\csname @cellbox\the\@cellcount\endcsname{\hbox{\usebox\@celltemp}}%
+ \global\advance\@cellcount 1\relax%
+}
+\let\vcell\savecellbox
+\def\printcelltop{%
+ \leavevmode\vbox to \dimexpr\rowht{%
+ \hbox to \expandafter\wd\csname @cellbox\the\@cellusecount\endcsname{%
+ \vrule height \arraystretch\ht\strutbox depth \arraystretch\dp\strutbox width 0pt%
+ \expandafter\usebox\csname @cellbox\the\@cellusecount\endcsname%
+ }%
+ \vss%
+ }%
+ \global\advance\@cellusecount 1\relax%
+ \ifnum\@cellusecount=\@cellcount\resetcellcount\fi%
+}
+\def\printcellmiddle{%
+ \leavevmode\vbox to \dimexpr\rowht{%
+ \vfill\hbox to \expandafter\wd\csname @cellbox\the\@cellusecount\endcsname{%
+ \vrule height \arraystretch\ht\strutbox depth 0pt width 0pt%
+ \expandafter\usebox\csname @cellbox\the\@cellusecount\endcsname%
+ }%
+ \vfill%
+ }%
+ \global\advance\@cellusecount 1\relax%
+ \ifnum\@cellusecount=\@cellcount\resetcellcount\fi
+}
+\def\printcellbottom{%
+ \leavevmode\vbox to \dimexpr\rowht{%
+ \vss\hbox to \expandafter\wd\csname @cellbox\the\@cellusecount\endcsname{%
+ \vrule height \rowht depth \rowdp width 0pt%
+ \expandafter\usebox\csname @cellbox\the\@cellusecount\endcsname
+ }%
+ }%
+ \global\advance\@cellusecount 1\relax%
+ \ifnum\@cellusecount=\@cellcount\resetcellcount\fi
+}
+\endinput \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/vcell/vcell.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/vcell/vcell.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0ba9a80376
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/vcell/vcell.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,271 @@
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{vcell,url,booktabs,multirow,tabularx,listings,ragged2e,color,colortbl}
+
+\lstloadlanguages{[LaTeX]TeX}
+\lstset{
+ basicstyle=\ttfamily,
+ columns=fullflexible,
+ backgroundcolor=\color[rgb]{0.82,0.82,0.82},
+ language=[LaTeX]TeX}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+\title{The package \texttt{vcell} : Vertical alignment for cells}
+\author{Xavier Dionne\thanks{The author wrote this package for its online table generator (\texttt{https://latex-tables.com}). You can contact him at info [at] latex-tables [dot] com.}}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This package offers a serie of low-level macros to align vertically the content of a cell, whether it has a fixed height or a variable height.
+
+\section{Using \texttt{vcell}}
+
+The idea behind \texttt{vcell} is to measure the height of cells to calculate the height of the row and then to print the cells in another row. This second row will be printed over the first one\footnote{Which can be understand as ``cheating'' for some.}. This process is not automated.
+
+In a row where cells are vertically-aligned, all cells must be vertically-aligned. Each cells can have a different alignment however.
+
+The commands available are those :
+\begin{center}
+\noindent\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{rX}
+\verb|\savecellbox{<content>}|&Measure and save a cell that is vertically aligned. It will have to be printed in a second row.\\
+\verb|\vcell{<content>}|&Shortcut for \verb|\savecellbox|\\
+\verb|\printcelltop|&Print a top-aligned cell\\
+\verb|\printcellmiddle|&Print a middle-aligned cell\\
+\verb|\printcellbottom|&Print a bottom-aligned cell\\
+\verb|\resetcellcount|&Reset the measurement of cells. This will be done automatically once you print all saved cells\\
+\end{tabularx}
+\end{center}
+Once your cells are measured, the following lengths will be available :
+\begin{center}
+\noindent\begin{tabular}{rl}
+\verb|\rowht|&The height of the row\\
+\verb|\rowdp|&The depth of the row\\
+\verb|\rowheight|&The total height of the row\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\section{Basic example}
+
+The following table :
+
+
+\begin{center}
+\noindent\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}lcr@{}}
+\toprule
+& Top cell & Middle cell & Bottom cell\\\midrule
+\vcell{\rule{0pt}{40pt}}&\savecellbox{Top}&\savecellbox{Middle}&\savecellbox{Bottom}\\[-\rowheight]
+\printcellmiddle&\printcelltop&\printcellmiddle&\printcellbottom\\\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+
+
+can be created with the following code :
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[breaklines]
+\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}lcr@{}}
+ \toprule
+ & Top cell
+ & Middle cell
+ & Bottom cell
+ \\ \midrule
+ \savecellbox{\rule{0pt}{40pt}}
+ & \savecellbox{Top}
+ & \savecellbox{Middle}
+ & \savecellbox{Bottom}
+ \\[-\rowheight]
+ \printcellmiddle
+ & \printcelltop
+ & \printcellmiddle
+ & \printcellbottom
+ \\ \bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+To ensure the height of the table, an invisible strut is used. However, any content could be used instead, even content with variable height. You can see the alignment of the table with this figure :
+
+\begin{center}
+\noindent\begin{tabular}{@{}clcr@{}}
+\toprule
+& Top cell & Middle cell & Bottom cell\\\midrule
+\savecellbox{\rule{10pt}{40pt}}&\savecellbox{\rule{10pt}{20pt}}&\savecellbox{\rule{10pt}{20pt}}&\savecellbox{\rule{10pt}{20pt}}\\[-\rowheight]
+\printcellmiddle&\printcelltop&\printcellmiddle&\printcellbottom\\\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+The commands works even if all the cells have the same height, as shown in the following table :
+
+\begin{center}
+\noindent\begin{tabular}{lcr@{}}
+\toprule
+Top cell & Middle cell & Bottom cell\\\midrule
+\savecellbox{Top}&\savecellbox{Middle}&\savecellbox{Bottom}\\[-\rowheight]
+\printcelltop&\printcellmiddle&\printcellbottom\\\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+
+\section{Special cases}
+
+
+
+\subsection{Usage of \texttt{multicolumn}}
+
+Whenever you want to use the command \verb|\multicolumn| because you want to change the alignment of your cell or because you want your cell to span several column, you have to repeat the command in the second row.
+
+\begin{center}
+\noindent\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}lcr@{}}
+\toprule
+& Top cell & Top cell & Bottom cell\\\midrule
+\savecellbox{\rule{0pt}{40pt}}&\multicolumn{2}{c}{\savecellbox{Top (2 cols)}}&\savecellbox{Bottom}\\[-\rowheight]
+\printcellmiddle&\multicolumn{2}{c}{\printcelltop}&\printcellbottom\\\bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+The previous table can be created with the following code :
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[breaklines]
+\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}lcr@{}}
+\toprule
+ & Top cell
+ & Top cell
+ & Bottom cell
+ \\ \midrule
+ \savecellbox{\rule{0pt}{40pt}}
+ & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\savecellbox{Top (2 cols)}}
+ & \savecellbox{Bottom}
+ \\ [-\rowheight]
+ \printcellmiddle
+ & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\printcelltop}
+ & \printcellbottom
+ \\ \bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\subsection{Paragraph columns}
+
+A frequent case is the use of paragraph columns (i.e. \verb|p|, \verb|m| or \verb|b| columns). The only rule is to use \verb|p| columns (or \verb|X| columns from the \texttt{tabularx} package) and avoid \verb|m| columns, otherwise it will mess with the alignment.
+
+\begin{center}
+\newdimen\rrowheight
+\noindent\begin{tabular}{@{}p{80pt}p{45pt}p{90pt}p{45pt}c@{}}
+\toprule
+Middle-p cell & Top-p cell & Bottom-p cell&Bottom-p cell & Middle cell\\\midrule
+\savecellbox{This is a paragraph that starts at the center and keeps continuing}&\savecellbox{Paragraph from top}&\savecellbox{This is the biggest paragraph. It is aligned from the bottom but you can't notice that.}&\savecellbox{Paragraph from bottom}&\savecellbox{Middle}\\\noalign{\global\setlength{\rrowheight}{\rowheight}\vspace{-\rowheight}}
+\printcellmiddle&\printcelltop&\printcellbottom&\printcellbottom&\printcellmiddle\\\bottomrule\noalign{\vspace{2pt}\verb|\rowheight=|\the\rrowheight}
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+It can be produced by this code :
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[breaklines]
+\begin{tabular}{@{}p{80pt}p{45pt}p{90pt}p{45pt}c@{}}
+ \toprule
+ Middle-p cell
+ & Top-p cell
+ & Bottom-p cell
+ & Bottom-p cell
+ & Middle cell
+ \\ \midrule
+ \savecellbox{This is a paragraph that starts at the center and keeps continuing}
+ & \savecellbox{Paragraph from top}
+ & \savecellbox{This is the biggest paragraph. It is aligned from the bottom but you can't notice that.}
+ & \savecellbox{Paragraph from bottom}
+ & \savecellbox{Middle}
+ \\ [-\rowheight]
+ \printcellmiddle
+ & \printcelltop
+ & \printcellbottom
+ & \printcellbottom
+ & \printcellmiddle
+ \\ \bottomrule
+\end{tabular}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\subsection{Usage with \texttt{colortbl}}
+
+You can use coloured cells with \texttt{colortbl}. However, the color declaration must be repeated before \verb|\printcellmiddle|, \verb|\printcelltop| or \verb|\printcellbottom| commands.
+
+\begin{center}
+\noindent\begin{tabular}{|>{\columncolor{red}}p{60pt}|c|}
+\hline
+Middle-p cell & \cellcolor{yellow}Bottom cell\\\hline
+\savecellbox{This is a paragraph that starts at the center and keeps continuing}&\cellcolor{green}\savecellbox{Paragraph from bottom}\\[-\rowheight]
+\printcellmiddle&\cellcolor{green}\printcellbottom\\\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[breaklines]
+\begin{tabular}{|>{\columncolor{red}}p{60pt}|c|}
+ \hline
+ Middle-p cell
+ & \cellcolor{yellow} Bottom cell
+ \\ \hline
+ \savecellbox{This is a paragraph that starts at the center and keeps continuing}
+ & \cellcolor{green}\savecellbox{Paragraph from bottom}
+ \\ [-\rowheight]
+ \printcellmiddle
+ & \cellcolor{green}\printcellbottom
+ \\ \hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\subsection{Usage with \texttt{multirow}}
+
+\texttt{vcell} does not support cells that spans several rows. If you want to use \verb|\multirow| in the same row as vertically-aligned cells, just use \verb|multirow| as you would normally do and skip it in the second row. You don't have to adjust the first argument of \verb|multirow|. You might want to use the optional argument of \verb|multirow| to get the vertical alignment that you want.
+
+\begin{center}
+\noindent\begin{tabular}{|c|>{\centering}p{60pt}|c|}
+\hline
+Multirow cell & Middle-p cell & Bottom cell\\\hline
+\multirow{2}{*}[-3.5em]{Two rows}&\savecellbox{ This is a paragraph that starts at the center and keeps continuing}&\savecellbox{Paragraph from bottom}\\[-\rowheight]
+&\printcellmiddle&\printcellbottom\\\cline{2-3}
+&\savecellbox{This is another paragraph that starts at the center and keeps continuing}&\savecellbox{Second paragraph from bottom}\\[-\rowheight]
+&\printcellmiddle&\printcellbottom\\\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\begin{lstlisting}[breaklines]
+\begin{tabular}{|c|>{\centering}p{60pt}|c|}
+ \hline
+ Multirow cell
+ & Middle-p cell
+ & Bottom cell
+ \\ \hline
+ \multirow{2}{*}[-3.5em]{Two rows}
+ & \savecellbox{This is a paragraph that starts at the center and keeps continuing}
+ & \savecellbox{Paragraph from bottom}
+ \\ [-\rowheight]
+ % We skip for the multirow
+ & \printcellmiddle
+ & \printcellbottom
+ \\ \cline{2-3}
+ & \savecellbox{This is another paragraph that starts at the center and keeps continuing}
+ & \savecellbox{Second paragraph from bottom}
+ \\ [-\rowheight]
+ % We skip for the multirow
+ & \printcellmiddle
+ & \printcellbottom
+ \\ \hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\section{Issues and limitations}
+
+This is a list of known issues and limitations from this package :
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Content generated by \verb|>{...}| or \verb|<{...}| in the preamble are not measured and may produce errors in some cases.
+\item \verb!m! columns will mess with vertical alignment.
+\item Glues such as \verb|\dotfill| or \verb|\hrulefill| are not supported in cells
+\item \verb|\verb| command is not supported in cells
+\end{itemize}
+
+However, we took great care to ensure that the content of the cell is only evaluated once, that no driver-specific commands were used and that selection in PDFs was not broken.
+
+\section{Licence}
+
+The contents of this package are distributed under the \LaTeX{} Project
+Public License,
+version 1.3c or later.
+
+
+\end{document} \ No newline at end of file